Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Pepwave Max User Manual 8.1.3
Pepwave Max User Manual 8.1.3
Pepwave Max User Manual 8.1.3
MAXSeries
UserM
anual
PepwaveProducts:
MAX700/HD2/HD2IP67/HD2Mini/HD2MBX/HDDome/HD4/HD4MBX/MBX
Mini/HD4IP67/Transit/TransitDuo/Transit5G/TransitCore/TransitMini/TransitPro
E/ B
R1Classic/ BR1MK2/BR1Slim/BR1ENT/BR1M2M/BR1Mini/BR1MiniCore/
BR1ESN/BR1ProLTE/BR1Pro5G/BR1IP55/BR1IP67/BR2IP55/On-The-Go/HD2
withMediaFast/HD4withM ediaFast/SpeedFusionEngine/UBRLTE/PDX
PepwaveFirmware8.1.3
October2021
Copyright&
T
rademarks
Specificationsa res ubjecttoc hangew ithoutn
otice. C
opyright©
2
021P
epwaveL td.A
llR
ightsR eserved. P
epwavea ndtheP epwavelogoa re
trademarkso fP
epwaveL td.O therb
randso rp
roductsm entionedm ayb
etrademarkso rr egisteredtrademarkso
ftheirr espectiveo
wners.
Tableo
fC
ontents
Introductiona
ndS
cope 8
Glossary 9
ProductF
eatures 10
SupportedN
etworkF
eatures 10
WAN 10
LAN 10
VPN 11
Firewall 11
CaptiveP
ortal 11
OutboundP
olicy 11
APC
ontroller 12
QoS 12
OtherS
upportedF
eatures 13
PepwaveM
AXM
obileR
outerO
verview 14
MAX7
00 14
MAXH
D2 15
D2IP67
MAXH 18
MAXH
D2m
ini 19
MAXH
DD
ome 20
MAXT
ransit/M
AXT
ransitD
uo( CAT-12) 22
MAXT
ransit( CAT-18) 24
MAXT
ransit5
G 26
MAXT
ransitM
ini 27
MAXT
ransitP
roE
28
MAXT
ransitC
ore 29
MAXB
R1E
SN 31
MAXH
D2a
ndH
D4w
ithM
ediaFast 32
MAXH
D4 33
MAXH
D4M
BX( CAT-12) 36
MAXH
D2/4M
BX( CAT-18) 38
MAXM
BXM
ini 39
MAXH
D4IP67 40
MAXB
R1C
lassic 41
MAXB
R1M
K2 43
MAXB
R1S
lim 45
MAXB
R1M
ini 46
MAXB
R1M
iniC
ore 48
MAXB
R1M
2M 48
MAXB
R1E
NT 51
MAXB
R1P
ro 52
MAXB
R1P
ro5
G 53
MAXH
otspot 55
MAXB
R1IP55 56
MAXB
R2IP55 58
MAXB
R1IP67 59
MAXO
n-The-Go 60
SpeedFusionE
ngine 61
UBRL
TE 61
PDX 62
AdvancedF
eatureS
ummary 64
Drop-inM
odea
ndL
ANB
ypass:T
ransparentD
eployment 64
QoS:C
learerV
oIP 64
Per-UserB
andwidthC
ontrol 65
HighA
vailabilityv iaV
RRP 65
USBM
odema
ndA
ndroidT
ethering 66
Built-InR
emoteU
serV
PNS
upport 66
SIM-cardU
SSDs upport 67
KVMV
irtualization 67
DPIE
ngine 68
NetFlow 68
Wi-FiA
irM
onitoring 68
SPD
efaultC
onfiguration 68
Installation 68
Preparation 69
ConstructingtheN
etwork 69
ConfiguringtheN
etworkE
nvironment 70
Mountingt heU
nit 71
WallM
ount 71
CarM
ount 71
IP67InstallationG
uide 71
PDXA
ccessoryK
itInstallationG
uide 72
SpeedFusionC
loud 81
ActivateS
peedFusionC
loudS
ervice 81
EnableS
peedFusionC
loud 84
ConnectC
lientstoC
loud 91
LinkW
i-FitoC
loud 92
OptimizeC
loudA
pplication 94
Configuringt heL
ANInterface(s) 95
BasicS
ettings 95
PortS
ettings 107
CaptiveP
ortal 108
Configuringt heW
ANInterface(s) 111
EthernetW
AN 111
DHCPC
onnection 114
StaticIPC
onnection 117
PPPoEC
onnection 118
L2TPC
onnection 120
GREC
onnection 121
CellularW
AN 123
Wi-FiW
AN 129
CreatingW
i-FiC
onnectionP
rofiles 135
WANH
ealthC
heck 136
DynamicD
NSS
ettings 138
AdvancedW
i-FiS
ettings 140
MediaFastC
onfiguration 144
SettingU
pM
ediaFastC
ontentC
aching 144
SchedulingC
ontentP
refetching 146
ViewingM
ediaFastS
tatistics 148
ContentHub 148
ConfiguringtheC
ontentHub 149
Configurea
w
ebsiteforC
ontentHub 149
Configurea
na
pplicationforC
ontentHub 152
Docker 153
KVM 154
BandwidthB
ondingS
peedFusionTM/P
epVPN 156
PepVPN 156
TheP
epwaveR
outerB
ehinda
N
ATR
outer 163
IPsecV
PN 164
IPsecV
PNS
ettings 165
GRET
unnel 169
OutboundP
olicy 171
OutboundP
olicy 172
AddingR
ulesforO
utboundP
olicy 173
Algorithm:W
eightedB
alance 177
Algorithm:P
ersistence 178
Algorithm:E
nforced 179
Algorithm:P
riority 180
Algorithm:O
verflow 180
Algorithm:L
eastU
sed 181
Algorithm:L
owestL
atency 181
ExpertM
ode 181
PortF
orwarding 183
UPnP/N
AT-PMPS
ettings 185
NATM
appings 185
QoS 187
UserG
roups 188
BandwidthC
ontrol 189
Application 189
ApplicationP
rioritization 189
PrioritizationforC
ustomA
pplications 190
DSL/CableO
ptimization 190
Firewall 190
Outbounda
ndInboundF
irewallR
ules 192
AccessR
ules 192
ApplyF
irewallR
ulestoP
epVpnT
raffic 196
IntrusionD
etectiona
ndD
oSP
revention 196
ContentB
locking 196
ApplicationB
locking 197
WebB
locking 197
CustomizedD
omains 198
ExemptedU
serG
roups 198
ExemptedS
ubnets 198
URLL
ogging 198
RoutingP
rotocols 199
OSPF&
R
IPv2 199
BGP 201
RemoteU
serA
ccess 206
L2TPw
ithIPsec 206
OpenVPN 206
PPTP 207
AuthenticationM
ethods 207
MiscellaneousS
ettings 209
HighA
vailability 209
CertificateM
anager 212
ServiceF
orwarding 213
SMTPF
orwarding 213
WebP
roxyF
orwarding 215
DNSF
orwarding 215
CustomS
erviceF
orwarding 215
ServiceP
assthrough 216
UART 217
GPSF
orwarding 219
IgnitionS
ensing 221
IgnitionS
ensinginstallation 221
GPIOM
enu 222
NTPS
erver 223
GroupedN
etworks 224
RemoteS
IMM
anagement 226
SIMT
oolkit 227
AP 229
APC
ontroller 230
WirelessS
SID 230
WirelessM
esh 234
Settings 235
APC
ontrollerS
tatus 241
Info 241
AccessP
oint( Usage) 243
WirelessS
SID 244
Mesh/W
DS 246
WirelessC
lient 247
NearbyD
evice 249
EventL
og 249
Toolbox 250
SystemS
ettings 250
AdminS
ecurity 251
Firmware 255
Time 257
Schedule 257
EmailN
otification 259
EventL
og 262
SNMP 263
SMSC
ontrol 265
InControl 265
Configuration 267
FeatureA
dd-ons 267
Reboot 268
Tools 268
Ping 268
TracerouteT
est 270
PepVPNT
est 270
Wake-on-LAN 270
CLI( CommandL
ineInterfaceS
upport) 271
Status 271
Device 271
GPSD
ata 273
ActiveS
essions 275
ClientL
ist 277
WINSC
lient 277
UPnP/N
AT-PMP 277
OSPF&
R
IPv2 278
BGP 278
SpeedFusionS
tatus 279
EventL
og 281
WANQ
uality 282
UsageR
eports 283
Real-Time 284
Hourly 284
Daily 285
Monthly 286
AppendixA
:R
estorationo
fF
actoryD
efaults 289
AppendixB
:F
usionSIMM
anual 290
AppendixC verviewo
:O fp
ortsu
sedb
yP
eplinkS
D-WANr outersa
ndo
therP
eplink
services 302
AppendixD
:D
eclaration 304
Introductiona
ndScope
Pepwave routers provide link aggregation and load balancing across multiple WAN
connections, allowing a combination of technologies like
3G
HSDPA, EVDO, 4G
LTE,
Wi-Fi,
externalW
iMAXd ongle,a nds atellitetob
eu
tilizedtoc onnecttotheInternet.
The MAX wireless S
D-WAN router series has a wide range of products suitable for many
different deployments and markets. Entry level SD-WAN models such as the MAX BR1 are
suitable
for
SMEs or
branch offices.
High-capacity SD-WAN routers such
as the MAX HD2 are
suitableforlargero
rganizationsa ndh
eado ffices.
This
manual covers
setting
up
Pepwave
routers
and
provides
an
introduction
to
their
features
andu
sage.
Tips
Wanttok nowm
orea
boutP
epwaver outers?V
isito
urY
ouTubeC
hannelfora
v ideointroduction!
https://youtu.be/13M-JHRAICA
Glossary
Thefollowingterms,a
cronyms,a
nda
bbreviationsa
refrequentlyu
sedinthism
anual:
Term Definition
3G 3rdg
enerations tandardsforw
irelessc ommunications( e.g.,H
SDPA)
4G 4thg
enerations tandardsforw
irelessc ommunications( e.g.,L
TE)
DHCP DynamicH
ostC
onfigurationP
rotocol
DNS DomainN
ameS
ystem
EVDO Evolution-DataO
ptimized
FQDN FullyQ
ualifiedD
omainN
ame
HSDPA High-SpeedD
ownlinkP
acketA
ccess
HTTP Hyper-TextT
ransferP
rotocol
ICMP InternetC
ontrolM
essageP
rotocol
IP InternetP
rotocol
LAN LocalA
reaN
etwork
ddress MediaA
MACA ccessC
ontrolA
ddress
MTU MaximumT
ransmissionU
nit
MSS MaximumS
egmentS
ize
NAT NetworkA
ddressT
ranslation
PPPoE PointtoP
ointP
rotocolo
verE
thernet
QoS Qualityo
fS
ervice
SNMP SimpleN
etworkM
anagementP
rotocol
TCP TransmissionC
ontrolP
rotocol
UDP UserD
atagramP
rotocol
VPN VirtualP
rivateN
etwork
VRRP VirtualR
outerR
edundancyP
rotocol
WAN WideA
reaN
etwork
WINS WindowsInternetN
ameS
ervice
WLAN WirelessL
ocalA
reaN
etwork
1 ProductFeatures
Pepwave routers enable all LAN users to share broadband Internet connections, and they
provide
advanced features to enhance Internet access. Our
Max BR wireless
routers
support
multiple
SIM
cards.
They
can be
configured to
switch from
using one SIM card to
another SIM
carda
ccordingtod
ifferentc riteria,includingw irelessn etworkr eliabilitya ndd
atau sage.
Our
MAX HD
series
wireless routers
are
embedded with
multiple
4G LTE modems, and allow
simultaneous wireless Internet connections through multiple
wireless networks.
The wireless
Internet connections can
be
bonded together
using
our SpeedFusion technology. This
allows
better
reliability,
larger
bandwidth, and increased
wireless coverage compared to
use only one
4GL TEm odem.
Below is
a list
of
supported
features
on
Pepwave
routers.
Features
vary
by
model.
For
more
information,p leases eep
eplink.com/products.
1.1 SupportedN
etworkF
eatures
1.1.1 WAN
● EthernetW
ANc onnectioninfull/halfd
uplex
● StaticIPs upportforP
PPoE
● Built-inc ellularm
odems
● USBm
obilec onnection(s)
● Wi-FiW
ANc onnection
● Networka
ddresstranslation( NAT)/porta
ddresstranslation( PAT)
● Inbounda
ndo
utboundN
ATm
apping
● IPsecN
AT-Ta
ndP
PTPp
acketp
assthrough
● MACa
ddressc lonea
ndp
assthrough
● CustomizableM
TUa
ndM
SSv alues
● WANc onnectionh
ealthc heck
● Dynamic DNS (supported service providers: changeip.com, dyndns.org, no-ip.org,
tzo.coma
ndD
NS-O-Matic)
● Ping,D
NSlookup,a
ndH
TTP-basedh
ealthc heck
1.1.2 LAN
● Wi-FiA
P
● EthernetL
ANp
orts
● DHCPs ervero
nL
AN
● ExtendedD
HCPo
ptions upport
● Staticr outingr ules
● VLANo
nL
ANs upport
1.1.3 VPN
● PepVPNw
ithS
peedFusionTM
● PepVPNp
erformancea
nalyzer
● X.509c ertificates upport
● VPNloadb
alancinga
ndfailovera
mongs electedW
ANc onnections
● Bandwidthb
ondinga
ndfailovera
mongs electedW
ANc onnections
● IPsecV
PNforn
etwork-to-networkc onnections( worksw
ithC
iscoa
ndJ uniper)
● Abilitytor outeInternettraffictoa
r emoteV
PNp
eer
● Optionalp
re-sharedk eys etting
● SpeedFusionTMthroughput,
p
ing,a
ndtraceroutetests
● PPTPs erver
● PPTPa
ndIPsecp
assthrough
1.1.4 Firewall
● Outbound( LANtoW
AN)firewallr ules
● Inbound( WANtoL
AN)firewallr ulesp
erW
ANc onnection
● Intrusiond
etectiona
ndp
revention
● Specificationo
fN
ATm
appings
● Outboundfirewallr ulesc anb
ed
efinedb
yd
estinationd
omainn
ame
1.1.5 CaptiveP
ortal
● Splashs creeno
fo
penn
etworks,loginp
agefors ecuren
etworks
● Customizableb
uilt-inc aptivep
ortal
● Supportslinkingtoo
utsidep
ageforc aptivep
ortal
1.1.6 OutboundP
olicy
● Linkloadd
istributionp
erT
CP/UDPs ervice
● Persistent routing for specified
source
and/or
destination
IP
addresses
per
TCP/UDP
service
● Trafficp
rioritizationa
ndD
SLo
ptimization
● Prioritizea
ndr outetraffictoV
PNtunnelsw
ithP
rioritya
ndE
nforceda
lgorithms
1.1.7 APC
ontroller
● Configurea
ndm
anageP
epwaveA
Pd
evices
● Reviewthes tatuso
fc onnectedA
Ps
1.1.8 QoS
● Qualityo
fs erviceford
ifferenta
pplicationsa
ndc ustomp
rotocols
● Userg
roupc lassificationford
ifferents ervicelevels
● Bandwidthu
sagec ontrola
ndm
onitoringo
ng
roup-a
ndu
ser-level
● Applicationp
rioritizationforc ustomp
rotocolsa
ndD
SL/cableo
ptimization
1.2 OtherSupportedFeatures
● User-friendlyw
eb-baseda
dministrationinterface
● HTTPa
ndH
TTPSs upportforw
eba
dmininterface( defaultr edirectiontoH
TTPS)
● Configurablew
eba
dministrationp
orta
nda
dministratorp
assword
● Firmware upgrades, configuration backups, ping, and traceroute via web admin
interface
● Remotew
eb-basedc onfiguration( viaW
ANa
ndL
ANinterfaces)
● Timeservers ynchronization
● SNMP
● Emailn
otification
● Read-onlyu
sera
ccessforw
eba
dmin
● SharedIPd
rop-inm
ode
● Authenticationa
nda
ccountingb
yR
ADIUSs erverforw
eba
dmin
● Built-inW
INSs ervers*
● Syslog
● SIPp
assthrough
● PPTPp
acketp
assthrough
● Eventlog
● Actives essions
● Clientlist
● WINSc lientlist*
● UPnP/N
AT-PMP
● Real-time,h
ourly,d
aily,a
ndm
onthlyb
andwidthu
sager eportsa
ndc harts
● IPv6s upport
● SupportU
SBtetheringo
nA
ndroid2
.2+p
hones
*N
ots upportedo
nM
AXS
urf-On-The-Go,a
ndB
R1v ariants
2 PepwaveMAXMobileRouterOverview
2.1 MAX7
00
2.1.1 PanelAppearance
2.1.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiA
Pa
ndW
i-FiW
ANIndicators
OFF Disconnected
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork
Wi-FiW
AN
Blinking Connectedton
etworkw
ithtraffic
ON Connectedton
etworkw
ithouttraffic
OFF
Disabled
Blinkings lowly Enabledb
utn
oc lientc onnected
Wi-FiA
P
Blinking Connectedton
etworkw
ithtraffic
ON Client(s)c onnectedtow
irelessn
etwork
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
GreenL
ED ON 10/1
00/1
000M
bps
Blinking Dataistransferring
OrangeL
ED
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.2 MAXH
D2
Forc ertificationinformation,p
leaser efertoA
ppendixB
:D
eclaration
2.2.1 PanelAppearance
2.2.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiA
Pa
ndW
i-FiW
ANIndicators
OFF DisabledIntermittent
Wi-FiW
AN/ Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-FiA P Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular1
/
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Cellular2
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.3 MAXHD2IP67
2.3.1 PanelAppearance
2.3.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
2.4 MAXH
D2m
ini
2.4.1 PanelAppearance
2.4.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular1
/
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Cellular2
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON POEE
nabled
GreenL
ED
OFF POED
isabled
Blinking 10/1
00/1
000M
bpsa
ndD
ataistransferring
OrangeL
ED
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.5 MAXH
DD
ome
2.5.1 PanelAppearance
2.6 MAXT
ransit/ M
AXT
ransitD
uo( CAT-12)
2.6.1 PanelAppearance
2.6.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular1
/
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Cellular2
*
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
*F
orM
AX-TST_DUO
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Wi-FiA
Pisturno
ff
Wi-Fi
Blinking Wi-FiA
Pisturno
n
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.7 MAXT
ransit( CAT-18)
2.7.1 PanelAppearance
2.7.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular1
/
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Cellular2
*
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
*F
orM
AX-TST_DUO
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Wi-FiA
Pisturno
ff
Wi-Fi
Blinking Wi-FiA
Pisturno
n
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.8 MAXT
ransit5
G
2.8.1 PanelAppearance
2.8.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular1
/
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Status
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Wi-FiA
Pisturno
ff
Wi-Fi
Blinking Wi-FiA
Pisturno
n
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.9 MAXT
ransitM
ini
2.9.1 PanelAppearance
2.9.2 LEDindicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Disabledintermittent
Wi-Fi Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
2.10 MAXT
ransitP
roE
2.10.1 PanelAppearance
2.10.2 LEDindicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
LAN1
P
ort
ON POEE
nabled
GreenL
ED
OFF POED
isabled
Blinking 10/1
00/1
000M
bpsa
ndD
ataistransferring
OrangeL
ED
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
LAN2
-3P
orta
ndE
thernetW
ANP
ort
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
2.11 MAXT
ransitC
ore
2.11.1 PanelAppearance
2.11.2 LEDindicators
Statusindicatedinthefrontp
anelisa
sfollows:
LEDIndicator
OFF–
P
owero
ff
PowerL
ED
GREEN–
P
owero
n
LAN1
P
ort
ON–
P OEE
nabled
GreenL
ED
OFF- P
OED
isabled
Blinking–
1
0/1
00/1
000M
bpsw
itha
ctivity
OrangeL
ED
OFF–
N
od
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
LAN2
-3P
orts,W
ANP
ort
GREEN–
1
000M
bps
RightL
ED
OFF–
1
0/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortsa
ren
otc onnected
ORANGE–
P
ortisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
LeftL
ED Blinking–
D
ataistransferring
OFF–
P
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
Console&
U
SBP
orts
ConsoleP
ort Reservedfore ngineeringu se
USBP
orts Forc onnecting4
G/3GU
SBm
odems
2.12 MAXB
R1E
SN
2.12.1 PanelAppearance
2.12.2 LEDindicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Disabledintermittent
Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-Fi
Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
2.13 MAXH
D2a
ndH
D4w
ithM
ediaFast
2.13.1 PanelAppearance
2.13.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
Status OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiA
Pa
ndW
i-FiW
ANIndicators
OFF DisabledIntermittent
Wi-FiW
AN/ Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-FiA P Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular1
/
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Cellular2
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANP
orts
ON POEE
nabled
GreenL
ED
OFF POED
isabled
Blinking 10/1
00/1
000M
bpsa
ndD
ataistransferring
OrangeL
ED
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
EthernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.14 MAXH
D4
2.14.1 PanelAppearance
2.14.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiA
Pa
ndW
i-FiW
ANIndicators
OFF DisabledIntermittent
Wi-FiW
AN/ Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-FiA P Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular1
/
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Cellular2
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANP
orts
ON POEE
nabled
GreenL
ED
OFF POED
isabled
Blinking 10/1
00/1
000M
bpsa
ndD
ataistransferring
OrangeL
ED
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
EthernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.15 MAXH
D4M
BX( CAT-12)
Forc ertificationinformation,p
leaser efertoA
ppendixB
:D
eclaration
2.15.1 PanelAppearance
2.15.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Cellulara
ndW
i-FiW
ANIndicators
OFF DisabledIntermittent
Wi-FiW
AN/ Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Cellular1
/
Cellular2
Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
GreenL
ED ON 10/1
00/1
000M
bps
Blinking Dataistransferring
OrangeL
ED
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.16 MAXH
D2/4M
BX( CAT-18)
2.16.1 PanelAppearance
2.16.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiA
Pa
ndW
i-FiW
ANIndicators
OFF DisabledIntermittent
Wi-FiW
AN/ Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Cellular1
/
Cellular2
Blinking
Connectedton
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedton
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
GreenL
ED ON 10/1
00/1
000M
bps
Blinking Dataistransferring
OrangeL
ED
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.17 MAXM
BXM
ini
2.17.1 PanelAppearance
2.17.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
LEDIndicator
OFF–
P
owero
ff
PowerL
ED
GREEN–
P
owero
n
LANP
orts
ON–
P
OEE
nabled
GreenL
ED
OFF- P
OED
isabled
Blinking–
1
0/1
00/1
000M
bpsw
itha
ctivity
OrangeL
ED
OFF–
N
od
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
WANP
orts
GREEN–
1
000M
bps
RightL
ED ORANGE–
1
00M
bps
OFF–
1
0M
bps
Solid–
P
ortisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
LeftL
ED Blinking–
D
ataistransferring
OFF–
P
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
Console&
U
SBP
orts
ConsoleP
ort Reservedfore
ngineeringu
se
USBP
orts Forc onnecting4
G/3GU
SBm
odems
2.18 MAXH
D4I P67
2.18.1 PanelAppearance
2.18.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
2.19 MAXB
R1C
lassic
Forc ertificationinformation,p
leaser efertoA
ppendixB
:D
eclaration
2.19.1 PanelAppearance
2.19.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Disabledintermittent
Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-Fi
Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
2.20 MAXB
R1M
K2
Forc ertificationinformation,p
leaser efertoA
ppendixB
:D
eclaration
2.20.1 PanelAppearance
2.20.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Disabledintermittent
Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-Fi
Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.21 MAXB
R1S
lim
2.21.1 PanelAppearance
2.21.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Disabledintermittent
Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-Fi
Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 100M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.22 MAXB
R1M
ini
Forc ertificationinformation,p
leaser efertoA
ppendixB
:D
eclaration
2.22.1 PanelAppearance
2.22.2 LEDIndicators
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF Disabledintermittent
Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-Fi
Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
2.23 MAXB
R1M
iniC
ore
2.23.1 PanelAppearance
2.23.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
2.24 MAXB
R1M
2M
2.24.1 PanelAppearance
2.24.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 100M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.25.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
Blinkings lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
GreenL
ED ON 10/1
00/1
000M
bps
Blinking Dataistransferring
OrangeL
ED
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.26 MAXB
R1P
ro
2.26.1 PanelAppearance
2.26.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular BlinkingS
lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.27 MAXB
R1P
ro5
G
2.27.1 PanelAppearance
2.27.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular BlinkingS
lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
Wi-FiIndicators
Wi-Fi/W
i-Fi
OFF Disabledintermittent
AP ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
LANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
WANP
ort
ON 1000M
bps
RightL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
LeftL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.28 MAXH
otspot
2.28.1 PanelAppearance
2.28.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.29 MAXB
R1I P55
2.29.1 PanelAppearance
2.29.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000Mbps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
CellularIndicators
Cellular OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Blinking
Connectington
etwork(s)inS
tandbyM
ode
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)inP
riority1
( Active)
LANa
ndW
ANIndicators
Green Powered-ond
evicec onnectedtoE
thernetp
ort
OFF Nod
evicec onnectedtoE
thernetp
ort
2.30 MAXB
R2I P55
2.30.1 PanelAppearance
2.30.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
Blinkingr ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF DisabledIntermittent
Blinkings lowly Connectingtow
irelessn
etwork(s)
Wi-Fi
Blinking
Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithtraffic
ON Connectedtow
irelessn
etwork(s)w
ithouttraffic
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular
ON Connectingo
rc onnectedton
etwork(s)
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000Mbps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Portisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.31 MAXB
R1I P67
2.31.1 PanelAppearance
2.32 MAXO
n-The-Go
2.32.1 PanelAppearance
2.32.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
CellularIndicators
OFF Modemisn
ota
ttachedtothep
ort
WAN
Green Modemisa
ttachedtothep
ort
Wi-FiIndicators
OFF DisconnectedfromA
P
Wi-Fi
Green ConnectedtoA
P
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Status Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Green Ready
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 100M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED
Blinking Dataistransferring
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
2.33 SpeedFusionE
ngine
2.33.1 PanelAppearance
2.34 UBRL
TE
2.34.1 PanelAppearance
2.34.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Systeminitializing
Red Bootingu
po
rb
usy
Status
BlinkingR
ed Bootu
pe
rror
Green Ready
LANa
ndE
thernetW
ANP
orts
ON 1000M
bps
GreenL
ED
OFF 10M
bps/1
00M
bpso
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
ON Portisc onnectedw
ithouttraffic
OrangeL
ED Blinking Dataistransferring
OFF Nod
ataisb
eingtransferredo
rp
ortisn
otc onnected
PortT
ype
AutoM
DI/MDI-Xp
orts
CellularIndicators
OFF Disabledo
rn
oS
IMc ardinserted
Cellular BlinkingS
lowly Connectington
etwork(s)
Green Connectedton
etwork(s)
2.35 PDX
2.35.1 PanelAppearance
2.35.2 LEDIndicators
Thes tatusesindicatedb
ythefrontp
anelL
EDsa
rea
sfollows:
StatusIndicators
OFF
Nob
atteryinstalled
Red Charging
Status
Blinkingr ed LowB
attery
Green FullC
harged
3 AdvancedFeatureSummary
3.1 Drop-inM
odea
ndL
ANB
ypass:T
ransparentD
eployment
As your organization grows, it may require
more bandwidth, but
modifying your
network can
be
tedious. Drop-in
In Mode, you can conveniently install
your
Peplink router
without making
any changes to your network. For any reason your Peplink router looses power, the LAN
Bypass will safely and automatically bypass the Peplink router to resume your original
networkc onnection.
Note:D
rop-inm
odeisc ompatibleforA
llM
AXm
odelse
xceptM
AXB
R1IP67
3.2 QoS:ClearerVoIP
VoIP
and
videoconferencing are highly
sensitive to
latency. With
QoS,
Peplink routers
can
detectV
oIPtraffica
nda
ssignittheh ighestp riority,g ivingy ouc rystal-clearc alls.
3.3 Per-UserB
andwidthC
ontrol
With per-user bandwidth control,
you
can
define
bandwidth control policies
for
up
to
3 groups
of users to prevent network congestion. Define groups by IP address and subnet, and set
bandwidthlimitsfore veryu serintheg
roup.
3.4 HighA
vailabilityv
iaV
RRP
When your organization has a corporate requirement demanding the
highest
availability
with
no
single
point of
failure,
you
can deploy
two Peplink routers High
in Availability
mode. With
HighA vailabilitym ode,thes econdd evicew illtakeo
verw henn
eeded.
Compatiblew
ith:M
AX7
00,M
AXH
D2( Allv ariants),H
D4( AllV
ariants)
3.5 USBM
odema
ndA
ndroidT
ethering
For
increased
WAN diversity,
plug
in
a USB
LTE
modem as a backup. Peplink
routers
are
compatible with over 200 modem types. You can also tether to smartphones running
Android4 .1.Xa
nda bove.
Compatiblew
ith:M
AX7
00,H
D2( allv ariantse
xceptIP67),H
D4( Allv ariants)
3.6 Built-InRemoteUserVPNSupport
Use
OpenVPN or L2TP
with
IPsec to
safely
and conveniently
connect remote
clients
to
your
private network. L2TP with
IPsec
is
supported by
most
devices,
but
legacy
devices
can
also
connectu singP
PTP.
Clickh
eref ort hef ullinstructionso
ns
ettingu
pL
2TPw
ithIPsec.
Clickh
eref ort hef ullinstructionso
ns
ettingu
pO
penVPNc onnections
3.7 SIM-cardU
SSDs
upport
Cellular-enabled routers can now use USSD to check their SIM card’s balance, process
pre-paidc ards,a
ndc onfigurec arrier-specifics ervices.
Clickh
eref orf ullinstructionso
nu
singU
SSD
3.8 irtualization
KVMV
KVMisa
v irtualisationm
odulethata
llowsa
dministratorsu singo
urr outerstoh
osta
large
rangeo
fv irtualm
achines.K
VMisn
ows upportedo ns omeM ediaFast/C ontentHubr outers.
Clickh
ereforthefullinstructionso
nh
owtos etu
pK
VM
Clickh
ereforthefullinstructionso
nh
owtos etu
pK
VMw
ithU torage
SBS
3.9 DPIE
ngine
The DPI report written in the updated KB article will show further information
on
InControl2
throughb reakingd owna pplicationc ategoriesintos ubcategories.
https://forum.peplink.com/t/updated-ic2-deep-packet-inspection-dpi-reports-and-everyt
hing-you-need-to-know-about-it/29658
3.10 NetFlow
NetFlowp rotocolisu
sedtotrackn
etworktraffic.T
rackinginformationfromN etFlowc anb e
senttotheN etFlowc ollector,w hicha
nalyzesd ataa ndg
eneratesr eportsforr eview.
Note:T
oe
nablet hisf eature,g
ot oh
ttps://<Device'sIP>/cgi-bin/MANGA/support.cgi
3.11 Wi-FiAirMonitoring
Pepwave routers support Wi-Fi “Air Monitoring Mode” which used to troubleshoot remotely
and proactively monitor Wi-Fi and WAN performance. The report can be viewed under
InControl2 >
R
eports>
A
irProbeR eportsa ftere
nablingW i-FiA
irM onitoring.
Note:T
oe
nablet hisf eature,g
ot oh
ttps://<Device'sIP>/cgi-bin/MANGA/support.cgi
3.12 SPDefaultConfiguration
TheS
PD
efaultC onfigurationfeaturew rittenintheu
pdatedK Ba
rticlea
llowsforthep rovisioningo f
customm ades ettings( a.k.a.InControl2c onfiguration)v iatheE
thernetL ANp
orta ndisidealforthose
wantingtod
oa
b
ulkd
eploymento fm
anyP eplinkd evices.
Note:Ify
ouw
ouldliket ou
set hisf eature,p
leasec
ontacty
ourp oint( Eg.VAD).
urchasep
4 Installation
Thefollowings ectiond
etailsc onnectingP
epwaver outerstoy ourn
etwork.
4.1 Preparation
Before installing your Pepwave router, please prepare the following as appropriate for your
installation:
● Atleasto
neInternet/WANa
ccessa
ccounta
nd/orW
i-Fia
ccessinformation
● Dependingo
nn
etworkc onnectiontype(s),o
neo
rm
oreo
fthefollowing:
○ EthernetW
AN:A
1
0/100/1000BaseTU
TPc ablew
ithR
J45c onnector
○ USB:A
U
SBm
odem
○ Embeddedm
odem:A
S
IMc ardfor5
G/4GL
TEs ervice
○ Wi-FiW
AN:W
i-Fia
ntennas
○ PC Card/Express
Card
WAN:
A PC
Card/ExpressCard
for
the
corresponding
cards lot
● A
computer installed
with
the
TCP/IP
network
protocol
and a supported
web browser.
Supported browsers include Microsoft
Internet
Explorer 11
or above, Mozilla
Firefox
24
ora
bove,A
ppleS afari7 o
ra
bove,a
ndG oogleC hrome1 8o
ra bove.
1. With an Ethernet cable, connect a computer to one of the LAN ports on the
Pepwave router. Repeat with different cables for up to 4 computers to be
connected.
2. With another Ethernet cable or a USB modem/Wi-Fi antenna/PC Card/Express
Card, connect to
one
of
the
WAN ports
on
the
Pepwave router.
Repeat
the
same
procedureforo therW ANp orts.
3. Connect the power adapter to the power connector on the rear panel of the
Pepwaver outer,a ndthenp
lugitintoa p
owero utlet.
5 MountingtheUnit
5.1 WallM
ount
The
Pepwave MAX 700/HD2/On-The-Go can
be
wall
mounted using
screws.
After
adding
the
screw on
the
wall,
slide
the
MAX
in
the
screw hole socket as
indicated below.
Recommended
screws pecification:M 3.5x 2
0mm,h eadd iameter6 mm,h eadthickness2 .4mm.
TheP
epwaveM
AXB
R1r equiresfours crewsforw
allm
ounting.
5.2 CarM
ount
The Pepwave MAX700/HD2 can be mounted in a vehicle using the included mounting
brackets.P
lacethem
ountingb
racketsb
ythetwos idesa nds crewthemo ntothed
evice.
5.4 PDXA
ccessoryK
itI nstallationG
uide
5.4.1 BatterySetappearance
● Step1
:L
ocktheb
atterys etinthes lotw
ith2
p
csM
3s crews.
● Step2
:P
lugp
owerc ableintothes ocket
● STEP3
:L
ockthes lotc overw
ith4
p
csM
3s crews.
5.4.2 SFE-DUOS
eta
ppearance
● STEP1
:A
ssembleS
MAc ablestothed
evice
● STEP2
:A
ssembleb
rackettothed
evice
● STEP3
:A
ssembleS
MAc onnectorstotheb
racket
● STEP4
:L
ocktheS
FE-Duos etinthes lotw
ith2
p
csM
3s crews.
● STEP5
:C
onnectD
Cp
ower&
E
THp
ort
● STEP6
:L
ockthes lotc overw
ith4
p
csM
3s crews.
0
6 ConnectingtotheWebAdminInterface
1. Start
a web
browser
on
a computer
that
is
connected
with
the
Pepwave
router
through
theL
AN.
2. To
connect
to
the
router’s
web admin
interface,
enter
the
following
LAN
IP
address
in
thea ddressfieldo fthew
ebb rowser:
http://192.168.50.1
(Thisisthed
efaultL
ANIPa
ddressforP
epwaver outers.)
3. Enterthefollowingtoa
ccessthew
eba
dmin
interface.
Username:a
dmin
Password:a
dmin
(Thisisthed
efaultu
sernamea
ndp
asswordfor
Pepwaver outers).
● Youm ustc hangethed efaultp
asswordonthefirsts uccessfullogon.
● Password requirements are: A minimum of 10 lower AND upper case characters,
includinga
tleast1
n
umber.
● WhenH TTPiss elected,theU RLw illb
er edirectedtoH
TTPSb yd efault.
Afters uccessfullogin,theD
ashboardo
fthew
eba
dmininterfacew
illb
ed
isplayed.
The Dashboard shows current WAN, LAN, and Wi-Fi AP statuses. Here, you can change
WAN connection
priority
and switch
on/off
the
Wi-Fi AP.
For
further
information on setting
up
thesec onnections,p leaser efertoS
ections8 a
nd9
.
Device Information displays details about the device, including model name, firmware
version,a
ndu
ptime.F
orfurtherinformation,p leaser efertoS ection2 2.
ImportantN
ote
Configuration changes (e.g. WAN, LAN, admin settings, etc.) will take effect only after clicking the
Save
button
at
the
bottom
of
each
page.
The Apply Changes button causes the changes to be
saved
anda
pplied.
7 SpeedFusionCloud
With Peplink products, your device is
able to
connect to SpeedFusion Cloud without
the
use
of
a second endpoint. This service has wide access to a number of SpeedFusion endpoints
hosted from around the
world,
providing your device
with unbreakable connectivity
wherever
youa re.*
*SpeedFusion Cloud
is
supported in
firmware
version
8.1.0
and above.
SpeedFusion
Cloud
is
a subscription basis. SpeedFusion Cloud license can be purchased at
https://store.peplink.com/> C
loudS
olutions> S
peedFusionC loudS
ervice.
7.1 ActivateS
peedFusionC
loudS
ervice
You
are
entitled
to
a 30-day
free
period with 100GB of
SpeedFusion usage
upon
activation
of
the
SpeedFusion Cloud service.
This
offer
is
limited
to
once
per
device.
To
get
your
activation
keyp leasev isitS
peedFusionC loud.
Go
to
activate.speedfusion.com and select the
type
of
SpeedFusion Cloud service, “Via
Free
30-days Trial” or “Via Care Plans”, that you would like to activate. Next, register or
login
to
youra ccount.
Selectthed
evicesthaty ouw
ishtoa
ctivateS
peedFusionC
loudo
na lickA
ndC CTIVATE.
From System > Features Add-ons, paste the license key into the window and click on
Activateo
ncey ouh aver eceivedthelicensek ey.
7.2 EnableS
peedFusionC
loud
EnableS loudfromS
peedFusionC peedFusionC
loud>
C
hooseC
loudL
ocation.
ChooseA
utomatic>
C
licko
nt heg
reent ickb
uttontoc onfirmthec hange.
nA
Clicko pplyC
hangestos avethec hange.
Byd
efault,ther outerw
illb
uilda
S
peedFusiontunneltotheS
peedFusionC
loud
Ify oua
rer unninga
latencys ensitives ervicelikev ideos treamingo rV
OIP,a W
ANS
moothing
sub-tunnelc anb avigatetoS
ec reated.N peedfusionC loud> C
hoosea c
loudlocation>
SFC.
AS
peedfusiontunnelc onfigurationw
indoww
illp
opo
ut. C nthe+
licko s igntoc reatethe
WANS moothings ub-tunnel.
nS
Clicko avea
ndA
pplyC
hangestos avethec onfiguration.N
ow,ther outerh
as2
SpeedfusiontunnelstotheS peedfusionC loud.
Createa no
utboundp olicytos teertheinternettraffictog
ointoS
peedfusionC loud.P leaseg
o
toA
dvanced> O
utboundP olicy,c licko nA
ddR uletoc reatea
n
ewo
utboundp olicy.
7.3 ConnectClientstoCloud
SpeedFusionC
loudp
rovidesa
c onvenientw aytor outetheL
ANc lienttothec loud.F
rom
SpeedFusionC loud> C
onnectC lientst oC loud.
Choosea
c
lientf romt hed
ropd
ownlist>
C
lick+
>
S
ave>
A
pplyC
hanges.
7.4 LinkWi-FitoCloud
SpeedFusionC loudp
rovidesa c onvenientw aytor outetheW
i-Fic lienttothec loudfrom
SpeedFusionC loud> L
inkW
i-Fit oC loud.T
hiso ptionisa
vailablef orB alance2 0X,
Balance3
0P
ro,a
ndB
alanceO ne.
Createa n
ewS
SIDforS
peedFusionC loud.T hen ewS
SIDw illinherita
lls ettingsfromo
neo
f
thee
xistingS SIDsincludingtheS
ecurityP henc lickSavefollowb
olicy.T yA pplyC hanges.
SpeedFusionC
loudS
SIDw
illb nD
es howno ashboard.
7.5 OptimizeCloudApplication
OptimizeC loudA
pplicationa
llowsy outor outeInternettraffictoS peedFusionC loudb
asedo
n
thea otoS
pplication.G peedFusionC loud> O
ptimizeC loudA pplication.
Selecta
C
louda
pplicationtor outethroughS
peedFusionC
loudfromthed ownlist>
ropd C
lick
>
S
ave>
A
pplyC
hanges.C lickthe tor emovea
s electedC
louda
pplicationto
routethroughS peedFusionC loud.
8 ConfiguringtheLANInterface(s)
8.1 BasicS
ettings
LAN interface settings are located at Network>LAN>Network Settings. Navigating to that
pagew ills howthefollowingd ashboard:
This
represents the
LAN interfaces that
are
active on
your router (including VLAN). A grey “X”
means that the VLAN is used in other settings and cannot be deleted. You can find which
settingsa reu
singtheV LANb yh
overingo verthegrey“ X”.
Alternatively, a red
“X”
means that
there
are
no
settings
using
the
VLAN.
You
can
delete
that
VLANb yc lickingther ed“ X”
Clickingo
na
nyo
fthee
xistingL
ANinterfaces( orc reatinga
n
ewo
ne)w
ills howthefollowing:
IPS
ettings
IPA
ddress TheIPa
ddressa
nds ubnetm
asko
ftheP
epwaver outero AN.
ntheL
NetworkS
ettings
Name Entera
n
amefortheL
AN.
Entera
n LAN.
umberfory ourV
VLANID
Layer2
P
epVPNB
ridging
PepVPNP The
rofiles remote network of
the
selected PepVPN profiles will
be
bridged with
this local
LAN,
creating
a Layer
2 PepVPN, they will
be
connected and operate
like
a single
toB
ridge LAN,a nda
nyb roadcasto rm
ulticastp acketsw illb
es ento
vertheV
PN.
RemoteN etwork
Enable this option if you want to block network traffic between the remote
Isolation networks,thisw illn
ota
ffectthec onnectivityb etweenthema ndthislocalL
AN.
SpanningT
ree
Clicktheb
oxw
ille
nableS
TPforthislayer2
p
rofileb
ridge.
Protocol
Select "Do not override" if the LAN IP address and local DHCP server should
OverrideIP
remainu nchangeda ftertheL ayer2
P
epVPNisu p.
Addressw
hen
bridge
connected If you choose to override IP
address when
the
VPN is
connected,
the
device
will
nota
cta
sa
router,a
ndm
ostL
ayer3
r outingfunctionsw
illc easetow
ork.
Clicko
ntheq
uestionM
arkify ouw
anttoe
nableD
HCPO
ption8
2.
DHCPO 2 This allows the device to inject Option 82 with Router Name information before
ption8
forwarding the DHCP Request packet to a PepVPN peer, such that the DHCP
Serverc anidentifyw
herether equesto
riginatesfrom.
DHCPS
erverS
ettings
When this setting is enabled, the DHCP server automatically assigns an IP
address to
each computer that
is
connected
via
LAN and
configured to
obtain an
DHCPS
erver
IP address via DHCP. The Pepwave router’s DHCP server can prevent IP
addressc ollisiono ntheL AN.
DHCPS
erver
Enableloggingo
fD
HCPe
ventsinthee
ventlogb
ys electingthec heckbox.
Logging
IPR
ange&
These settings allocate a range of IP addresses that will be assigned to LAN
SubnetM ask computersb ytheP epwaver outer’sD HCPs erver.
This setting specifies the length of time throughout which an IP address of a
DHCP client remains valid. Upon expiration of the lease time, the assigned IP
LeaseT
ime
address will
no
longer
be
valid
and renewal of
the
IP
address assignment will
be
required.
This
option allows
you
to
input
the
DNS
server
addresses to be
offered
to DHCP
DNSS
ervers clients. If Assign DNS server automatically is selected, the
Pepwave router’s
built-inD
NSs ervera ddress( i.e.,L ANIPa
ddress)w illb ffered.
eo
This option allows you to optionally specify a Windows Internet Name Service
(WINS) server. You may choose to use the built-in WINS server or external
WINSs ervers.
ervers When this unit is connected using SpeedFusion , other VPN peers can
share
TM
WINSS
this unit's built-in WINS server by entering this unit's LAN IP address in their
DHCP WINS Server setting. Afterward, all
PC
clients in
the
VPN can
resolve the
NetBIOS names of
other clients in
remote peers. If
you
have enabled this
option,
alisto
fW INSc lientsw illb
ed isplayeda tS tatus>WINSC lients.
BOOTP Checkthisb
oxtoe
nableB
OOTPo
no
ldern
etworksthats tillr equireit.
Extended In addition to standard DHCP options (e.g., DNS server address, gateway
address, subnet mask), you can
specify
the
value of
additional
extended DHCP
DHCPO
ption
options,
as
defined
in
RFC
2132.
With
these
extended
options
enabled,
you
can
passa
dditionalc onfigurationinformationtoL
ANh
osts.
To define an
extended DHCP option, click
theAdd
button,
choose the
option to
define and enter its
value. For values that
are in
IP
address list
format, you
can
enter one
IP
address per
line
in
the
provided text area input
control. Each option
canb ed
efinedo nceo nly.
This setting reserves the
assignment of
fixed
IP addresses for
a list
of computers
on the LAN. The computers to be assigned fixed
IP
addresses on the
LAN
are
identified by
their
MAC addresses. The fixed
IP
address assignment is
displayed
as a cross-reference list between the computers’ names, MAC addresses, and
DHCP fixedIPa ddresses.
Reservation Name (an optional field) allows you to specify a name
to
represent
the
device.
MAC
addresses
should
be
in
the
format 00:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE. Press
of to
create a new record. Press to remove a record. Reserved client
information can
be
imported from Client
the List, located Status>Client
at List.
Form
ored leaser efertoS
etails,p ection2 2.3.
LANP
hysicalS
ettings
This is
the port
speed of
the
LAN interface. It
should be set to
the
same speed as
the
connected device to
avoid
port
negotiation problems. When a static
speed is
Speed set, you may choose whether to advertise its
speed to
the
peer device. Auto is
selected by default.
You can
choose not
to
advertise the port speed if
the
port
has
difficultyn egotiatingw iththep eerd evice.
StaticR
outeS
ettings
This table is for
defining
static
routing rules
for
the
LAN
segment.
A static
route
consists of the network address, subnet mask, and gateway address. The
addressa nds ubnetm askv aluesa reinw .x.y.zformat.
StaticR
oute The
local
LAN
subnet
and
subnets
behind
the
LAN
will
be
advertised
to
the
VPN.
Remote routes
sent
over the
VPN
will
also
be
accepted. Any VPN
member will
be
able to route to the local subnets. Press to create a new route. Press
tor emovea
r oute.
- A
A
dvancedfeature,p leasec lickthe b uttono
nthetopr ighth
andc ornero
ftheS
taticR
outes ection
toa ctivatea
ndc onfigureV
irtualN etworkM
appingtor esolven etworka
ddressc onflictw ithr emote
peers.
In case of a network address conflict with remote peers (i.e. PepVPN / IPsec VPN / IP
Forwarding WAN are considered as remote connections), you can define Virtual Network
Mappingtor esolveit.
Note: OSPF & RIPv2 settings should be updated as well to a
void advertising conflicted
networks.
Forfurtherd
etailso
nv irtualn
etworkm
appingw
atchthisv ideo:
https://youtu.be/C1FMdZCn3Z8
VirtualN
etworkM
apping
Every IP Address in the Local Network has a corresponding unique Virtual IP
AddressforN AT.
Traffic
originating from
the Local
Network to
remote connections will
be SNAT'ed
One-to-OneN
AT
andb ehavelikec omingfromthed efinedV irtualN etwork.
While traffic initiated by remote peers to the Virtual Network will be DNAT'ed
accordingly.
The
subnet
range
defined
in
Local
Network
will
be
mapped
to
a single
Virtual
IP
Many-to-OneN
AT Address for NAT. Traffic can only be initiated from local to remote, and these
trafficw
illb
eN
AT'eda
ndb
ehaveslikec omingfromthes ameV
irtualIPA
ddress.
WINSS
erverS
ettings
Check the
box
to
enable
the
WINS
server.
A list
of
WINS
clients
will
be
displayed
Enable
atS
tatus>WINSC lients.
DNSP
roxyS
ettings
To enable the DNS proxy feature, check this box, and then set up the
feature Network>LAN>DNS
at Proxy Settings. A DNS proxy server can
Enable be enabled to serve DNS requests originating from
LAN/PPTP/SpeedFusionTM peers. Requests are forwarded to the DNS
servers/resolversd efinedfore achW ANc onnection.
This field is to enable DNS caching on the built-in DNS proxy server.
When the option is
enabled,
queried
DNS replies will
be
cached until
the
DNSC
aching records’ TTL has been reached. This feature can help improve DNS
lookup time. However, it
cannot
return
the
most up-to-date result for
those
frequentlyu pdatedD NSr ecords.B efault,D
yd NSC achingisd isabled.
When
this
option enabled, the
is DNS
proxy
server
will
also
forward
DNS
IncludeG
oogleP
ublic
requests to
Google's
Public
DNS Servers, in
addition
to
the
DNS servers
DNSS ervers defined in each WAN. This
could
increase the DNS
service's availability.
Thiss ettingisd
isabledb
yd
efault.
This table is for defining custom local DNS records. A static local DNS
record consists of a host
name and IP
address.
When looking up the
host
LocalD
NSR
ecords name from
the LAN to
LAN
IP
of
the
Pepwave router,
the corresponding
IP address will be returned. Press to
create
a new
record.
Press
tor emovea r ecord.
resolver IP address(es). Queries will be forwarded to the selected
connections’ resolvers. If all of the selected connections are down,
queriesw illb
eforwardedtoa llr esolverso nh ANc onnections.
ealthyW
A
- A
dvancedfeature,p
leasec lickthe b
uttono
nthetopr ighth ctivate.
andc ornertoa
Finally, if needed, configure Bonjour forwarding, Apple’s zero configuration networking
protocol.O nceV LANc onfigurationisc omplete,c lickS
avetos torey ourc hanges.
BonjourF
orwardingS
ettings
Enable Checkthisb
oxtoturno
nB
onjourforwarding.
ChooseS
ervicea
ndC
lientn
etworksfromthed
rop-downm
enus,a
ndthenc lick
BonjourS
ervice
toa
ddthen
etworks.T
od
eletea
ne
xistingB
onjourlisting,c lick .
Drop-InM
ode
Drop-in mode (or
transparent bridging
mode) eases the installation of
the Pepwave MAX on
a
live network between the firewall and router, such that changes to the settings of existing
equipmenta ren otr equired.
Thefollowingd
iagramillustratesd
rop-inm
odes etup:
Check the box Enable to enable the
Drop-in
Mode. After
enabling
this
feature
and
selecting
the WAN for Drop-in mode, various settings including
the
WAN's
connection method and
IP
addressw illb
ea utomaticallyu pdated.
When drop-in
mode is
enabled, the
LAN and
the WAN for
drop-in
mode ports
will
be
bridged.
Traffic
between the
LAN hosts
and WAN router will
be forwarded between the
devices. In
this
case,theh ostso nb
oths idesw illn
otn oticea nyIPo rM
ACa ddressc hanges.
After successfully setting
up
the
Pepwave MAX as
part
of
the
network
using
drop-in
mode,
it
will, depending on model, support one or more WAN connections. Some MAX units also
support multiple WAN connections after activating drop-in mode, though a SpeedFusion
licensem ayb
er equiredtoa ctivatem orethano neW ANp ort.
Pleasen
otet heD
rop-InM
odeism
utuallye
xclusivew
ithV
LAN.
Drop-inM
odeS
ettings
Drop-in mode eases the installation of the Pepwave MAX on a live network
between the existing firewall and router, such that no
configuration
changes are
Enable required on existing equipment. Check the box to enable the drop-in mode
feature.
WANf or
Select the WAN port to be used for drop-in mode. If WAN is
selected,
the
high
Drop-InM
ode availabilityfeaturew illb ed isableda utomatically.
When this
option is
enabled, the
passthrough IP
address will
be
used to
connect
to
WAN hosts
(email notification,
remote
syslog, etc.).
The MAX will
listen for
this
IP address when WAN hosts access services provided by
the
MAX (web admin
SharedD
rop-In
accessfromtheW AN,D NSs erverr equests,e
tc.).
IPA To
connect to
hosts on
the LAN
(email notification, remote syslog, etc.),
the default
gateway address will be
used.
The
MAX will
listen
for
this
IP
address when LAN
hosts access services provided by the MAX (web admin access from the
WAN,
DNSp roxy,e tc.).
Access to
this
IP address will
be passed through to
the
LAN port
if
this
device is
not serving the service being accessed. The shared IP address will be used in
SharedIP
connecting to
hosts on the WAN (e.g.,
email notification, remote syslog, etc.)
The
AddressA device will
also listen on the IP address when hosts on
the WAN access services
servedo nthisd evice( e.g.,w eba dmina ccessesfromW AN,D NSs erver,e tc.)
Enter
the
WAN
router's
IP
address
in
this
field.
If
there
are
more
hosts
in
addition
WAND
efault
to the router on the WAN segment, click the button next to “WAN Default
Gateway” and check the other host(s) on
the
WAN segment box and enter
the
Gateway IP address of the hosts that need to access LAN devices or be accessed by
others.
WAND NS
Enterthes electedW
AN'sc orrespondingD
NSs erverIPa
ddresses.
Servers
A
- Advancedfeature,p leasec lickthe b
uttono
nthetopr ight-handc ornertoa
ctivate.
Toe
nableV
LANc onfiguration,c lickthe uttonintheIPS
b ettingss ection.
To
add
a new
LAN,
click New
the LAN
button.
To
change
LAN
settings,
click
the
name
of
the
LANtoc hangeu ndertheL ANh eading.
Thefollowings ettingsa
red
isplayedw
henc reatinga
n
ewL
ANo
re
ditinga
ne
xistingL
AN.
IPS
ettings
IPA
ddress&
Enter the Pepwave router’s IP address and
subnet
mask
values
to
be
used
on
SubnetM ask AN.
theL
NetworkS
ettings
Name Entera
n
amefortheL
AN.
VLANID Entera
n AN.
umberfortheL
Inter-VLAN
Checkthisb
oxtoe
nabler outingb
etweenv irtualL
ANs.
routing
CaptiveP
ortal Checkthisb
oxtoturno
nc aptivep
ortals.
DHCPS
erverS
ettings
When this setting is enabled, the Pepwave router’s DHCP server automatically
assigns an IP
address to
each computer that is
connected
via
LAN and configured
to obtain an IP address via DHCP. The Pepwave router’s DHCP server can
DHCPS
erver preventIPa ddressc ollisionso ntheL
AN.
Toe
nableD
HCPb
ridger elay,p
leasec lickthe icono
nthism
enuitem.
IPR
ange&
These settings allocate a range of IP addresses that will be assigned to LAN
SubnetM ask computersb ytheP epwaver outer’sD HCPs erver.
This
setting
specifies the
length of
time throughout which an IP
address of
a DHCP
LeaseT
ime client
remains valid.
Upon expiration Lease
of Time, the assigned
IP
address will
nolongerb ev alida ndtheIPa ddressa ssignmentm ustb er enewed.
This option allows
you
to
input
the
DNS
server
addresses
to
be
offered
to
DHCP
DNSS
ervers clients. If Assign DNS server automatically is selected, the Pepwave router’s
built-inD
NSs ervera
ddress( i.e.,L
ANIPa
ddress)w
illb
eo
ffered.
This option allows you to specify the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS)
server. You may choose to
use
the
built-in
WINS server or
external
WINS servers.
When this
unit
is
connected using SpeedFusionTM, other VPN peers
can share this
WINSS
ervers unit's built-in WINS server by entering this unit's LAN IP address in their DHCP
WINS Servers setting. Therefore, all PC clients in the VPN can resolve the
NetBIOS names of
other clients in
remote peers.
If
you
have enabled this option, a
listo
fW
INSc lientsw illb
ed isplayeda tS
tatus>WINSC lients.
BOOTP Checkthisb
oxtoe
nableB
OOTPo
no
ldern
etworksthats tillr equireit.
In
addition to standard DHCP options (e.g. DNS server address, gateway address,
subnet mask), you can specify the
value of
additional extended DHCP options, as
ExtendedD defined in RFC 2132. With these extended options enabled, you can pass
HCP
additional configuration information to LAN hosts. To define an extended DHCP
Option option, click the Add button, choose the
option to
define,
and
then enter
its
value.
For values that are
in
IP address list
format, you can enter
one
IP
address per line
inthep rovidedtexta reainputc ontrol.E acho ptionc anb ed
efinedo nceo nly.
This setting
reserves the
assignment of
fixed
IP
addresses for
a list
of
computers
on the LAN. The computers to be assigned fixed IP addresses on the LAN are
identified by their MAC addresses. The fixed
IP
address assignment is
displayed
as a cross-reference list between the computers’ names, MAC addresses, and
DHCP fixedIPa ddresses.
Reservation Name (an optional field) allows you to specify a name to represent the device.
MAC addresses should be
in
the
format 00:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE. Press
of to
create a new record. Press to remove a record. Reserved clients
information can be imported from the Client List, located Status>Client
at List.
Form
ored leaser efertoS
etails,p ection2 2.3.
To configure DHCP relay, first click the button
found
next
to DHCP
the Server
option
to
displaythes ettings.
DHCPR
elayS
ettings
Enable Checkthisb
oxtoturno
nD
HCPr elay.C
lickthe icontod
isableD
HCPr elay.
Enter the IP addresses of one or two DHCP servers in the
provided
fields.
The
DHCPS
erverIP
DHCP servers entered here will receive relayed DHCP requests from the LAN.
Address For active-passive DHCP server configurations, enter active and passive
DHCP
ddressesinD
serverr elayIPa HCPS erver1
a
ndD
HCPS erver2 .
DHCP Option
82
includes device information
as relay
agent for the
attached client
when forwarding DHCP requests from client to server. This option also
embeds
DHCPO
ption8
2
the
device’s MAC address and network name
in circuit
and remote IDs. Check
this
boxtoe nableD HCPO ption8 2.
Once DHCP is set up, configure LAN Physical Settings, Static Route Settings, WINS
ServerS ettings,a ndD NSP roxyS
ettingsa sn
oteda bove.
8.2 PortS
ettings
Toc onfigurep avigatetoN
orts ettings,n etwork>
P
ortS
ettings
On this screen, you can enable specific ports, as well as determine the speed of the LAN
ports, whether
each port
is a trunk
or
access
port,
can well as
which
VLAN each
link belongs
to,ifa
ny.
8.3 CaptiveP
ortal
The captive portal serves as a gateway that clients have to pass if
they
wish
to
access
the
internetu singy ourr outer.T oc onfigure,n avigatetoN etwork>LAN>CaptiveP ortal.
CaptiveP
ortalS
ettings
Check Enable and then, optionally, select the LANs/VLANs that will use the
Enable
captivep ortal.
To customize the portal’s form submission and redirection URL, enter a new
Hostname
URLinthisfield.T
or esettheU RLtofactorys ettings,c lickD
efault.
Click Open Access to allow clients to freely access your router. Click User
AccessM
ode Authentication to force your clients to authenticate before accessing your
router.
This authenticates your clients through a RADIUS server. After selecting this
option,y ouw
ills eethefollowingfields:
RADIUSS
erver
Fill
in
the
necessary
information
to
complete
your
connection
to
the
server
and
enablea uthentication.
This authenticates your clients through a LDAP server. Upon selecting this
LDAPS
erver option,y ouw
ills eethefollowingfields:
Fill
in
the
necessary
information
to
complete
your
connection
to
the
server
and
enablea uthentication.
AccessQ
uota Seta
timea
ndd
atac aptoe
achu
ser’sInternetu
sage.
This menu determines how your usage quota resets. Setting it to Daily will
QuotaR
eset
reset
it
at
a specified
time
every day. Setting
a number minutes
of after quota
Time reached establish a timer for each user
that
begins
after
the
quota has
been
reached.
Here, you can choose between using the Pepwave router’s built-in captive
SplashP
age
portala
ndr edirectingc lientstoa
U
RLy oud efine.
The Portal Customization menu has two options: and . Clicking
displays a pop-up previewing the captive portal that your clients will see. Clicking
displaysthefollowingm enu:
PortalC
ustomization
LogoImage ClicktheC
hooseF
ileb
uttontos electa
logotou
sefortheb
uilt-inp
ortal.
Custom
Landing Fillinthisfieldtor edirectc lientstoa
ne
xternalU
RL.
Page
9 ConfiguringtheWANInterface(s)
WAN Interface settings are located at Network>WAN. To reorder WAN priority,
drag on
the
appropriate WAN by
holding the
left
mouse
button,
move it
to
the
desired priority
(the first
one
would be
the highest priority,
the
second
one
would
be
lower priority,
and
so
on),
and
drop it
byr eleasingthem ouseb utton.
To
able
a particular
WAN
connection, drag
on the
appropriate
WAN
by
holding the
left
mouse
oveittheD
button,m isabledr ow,a
ndd
ropitb
yr eleasingthem
ouseb
utton.
You can also set priorities on the Dashboard. Click Details
the button
in
the
corresponding
rowtom odifythec onnections etting.
ImportantN
ote
Connectiond
etailsw
illb
ec hangeda
ndb
ecomee fterc lickingtheSavea
ffectiveimmediatelya ndA
pplyb
utton.
9.1 EthernetW
AN
HealthC
heckS
ettings
Thisfields pecifiestheH
ealthC
heckm
ethodtob
eu
sedforthisW
ANc onnection.
● Disabled - The WAN
connection is
always considered to
be up
and
will not
betreateda sd
ownfora nyIPr outinge rrors.
● PING - ICMP PING packets will be issued to test connectivity with
HealthC
heck
configurabletargetIPa ddresseso rh
ostn ames.
Method ● DNS Lookup - DNS lookups will be issued to test the connectivity with
configurabletargetD NSs erverIPa ddresses.
● HTTP - HTTP connections will be issued to test the connectivity with
configurableU RLsa nds tringstom atch.
Default:D
NSL
ookup.
These fields
are
for
specifying the
target
IP
addresses
or
host
names
where
ICMP
Pingp
acketsw illb
es enttoforh
ealthc heck.
If
the
box
Use
first
two
DNS
servers
as
PING
Hosts
is
checked,
the
first
two
DNS
PINGH
osts servers will be the ping targets for checking the connection healthiness. If the box
isn
otc hecked,thefieldH
ost1
m
ustb
efilleda
ndthefieldH
ost2
iso
ptional.
The connection is
considered
to
be
up
if
ping
responses
are
received
from
any
one
ofthep ingh
osts.
If
a health check
test
cannot be
completed
within
the
specified
amount
of
time,
the
Timeout testw illb
etreateda sfailed.
HealthC
heck
Thisisthetimeintervalb
Interval etweene
achh
ealthc hecktest.
HealthC
heck
This is the number of consecutive check failures before treating
a connection
as
Retries down.
Recovery This is the number of responses required after a health check failure before
Retries treatinga c onnectiona su pa gain.
BandwidthA
llowanceM
onitorS
ettings
Bandwidth
Check the box Enable to enable bandwidth usage monitoring on this WAN
Allowance
connection for
each billing
cycle.
When this
option
is
not enabled,
bandwidth
usage
Monitor ofe
achm
onthiss tillb
eingtrackedb
utn oa
ctionw
illb
etaken.
Action If
the
box Disconnect when usage hits 100% of
monthly allowance is
checked,
WAN connection will be disconnected automatically when the usage hits the
this
monthly allowance. It
will
not
resume unless
this
option has
been
turned
off
or
the
usageh asb eenr esetw hena n ewb
illingc ycles tarts.
StartD
ay Thiso
ptiona
llowsy outos electw
hichd
ayo
fthem
ontha illingc ycles tarts.
b
Monthly
Allowance Thisfieldistos pecifytheb
andwidtha
llowancefore
achb
illingc ycle.
AdditionalP
ublicIPS
ettings
Ify ouh
avea
ccesstos tatusp
ublicIPa
ddresses,y ouc ana
ssignthemo
nthisfield.
DynamicD
NSS
ettings
This setting
specifies
the
dynamic DNS service provider
to
be
used
for
the
WAN
based
ons upportedd ynamicD NSs ervicep
roviders:
● changeip.com
DynamicD NS
● dyndns.org
ServiceP
rovider ● no-ip.org
● tzo.com
● DNS-O-Matic
SelectD
isabledtod eeS
isablethisfeature.S ection9
.5forc onfigurationd
etails.
9.1.1 DHCPC
onnection
Therea
refourp
ossiblec onnectionm
ethods:
1. DHCP
2. StaticIP
3. PPPoE
4. L2TP
5. GRE
TheD
HCPc onnectionm ethodiss uitableiftheISPp
rovidesa nIPa
ddressa utomatically
usingD
HCP( e.g.,s atellitem
odem,W iMAXm odem,c able,M
etroE thernet,e
tc.).
DHCPC
onnectionS
ettings
NAT
allows
substituting
the
real
address
in
a packet
with
a mapped
address
RoutingM
ode
that
is
routable on
the
destination
network.
By
clicking the
help
icon
in
this
isplaytheIPF
field,y ouc and orwardingo
ption,ify ourn
etworkr equiresit.
If your service provider's DHCP server requires you to supply a hostname
Hostname value upon acquiring an IP address, you may enter the value
here. If
your
(Optional) service provider does
not
provide
you
with the
value,
you can
safely bypass
thiso ption.
Management IP Address is available for configuration when you click the
ManagementIP
linkintheh
elp iconv iatheH
ostname.
Address
This option allows you to configure the management IP address for the
DHCPW ANc onnection.
Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for
DNS lookups. This
setting
specifies
the
DNS (Domain Name System) servers to
be used
when a DNS
lookupisr outedthroughthisc onnection.
Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS
servers being assigned by the WAN DHCP server
to
be
used
for
outbound
DNSS
ervers
DNS lookups over
the
connection. (The DNS
servers are
obtained along
with
theW
ANIPa ddressa ssignedfromtheD HCPs erver.)
When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may
enter custom DNS server addresses for
this
WAN
connection into DNS
the
Server1 a
ndD
NSS erver2 fields.
When this IP Passthrough option is active, after the ethernet WAN
connection is up, the router's DHCP server will offer the connection's IP
address to one LAN client. All incoming or outgoing traffic will be routed
withoutN
AT.
Regardless the
WAN connection's state,
the
router
always binds to
the
LAN
IP
address (Default: 192.168.50.1). So
when the
ethernet WAN is
connected,
the LAN client
could
access
the router's web admin by
manually configuring
IPP
assthrough its IP address to the same subnet as the router's L
AN IP address (e.g.
192.168.50.10).
Note: when this option is firstly enabled, the LAN client may not
be able
to
refresh its IP address to the ethernet WAN IP address in a timely fashion.
The LAN client may have to manually renew its IP address from DHCP
server. After this option is enabled, the DHCP lease time will
be
2 minutes.
I.e. the LAN client could refresh its IP address and access the network at
mosto neminutea fterthee thernetW ANc onnectiong oesu p.
Independentf rom
If this is checked, the connection will be working independent from other
BackupW
ANs Backup WAN connections. Those
in Backup Priority will
ignore
the
status of
this
WAN
connection, and
will
be
used
when
none
of
the
other
higher
priority
connectionsa rea
vailable.
This option allows you to choose whether to remain connected when this
WAN connection is no longer in the highest priority and has entered the
standby state. When Remain connected is chosen, upon bringing up this
WANc onnectiontoa ctive,itwillb
eimmediatelya vailableforu se.
StandbyS
tate If this WAN connection
is
charged by
connection time,
you
may
want
to
set
thiso ptiontoD isconnects othatc onnectionw illb
em adeo nlyw
henn
eeded.
PepVPN may
use connected standby WAN for
failover if
link
failure
detected
on the higher priority WAN, you can set this option to Disconnect to
avoid
datap assingthrough.
andwidth This value is referenced when default weight is chosen
UploadB for
outbound
traffic
and traffic prioritization. A correct value can result in effective traffic
prioritizationa nde
fficientu
seo fu
pstreamb andwidth.
Thisfieldr eferstothem
aximumd
ownloads peed.
Download
Default weight control for outbound traffic will be
adjusted
according
to
this
Bandwidth
value.
StaticIPS
ettings
NAT
allows
substituting
the
real
address
in
a packet
with
a mapped
address
that
RoutingM
ode is
routable
on
the
destination
network.
By
clicking
the
help
icon
in
this
field,
you
isplaytheIPF
cand orwardingo
ption,ify ourn
etworkr equiresit.
IPA
ddress/
These settings allow you to specify the information required in order to
SubnetM ask/
communicate on the Internet via a fixed
Internet
IP
address.
The
information is
Default
typicallyd
eterminedb ya ndc anb eo btainedfromtheISP.
Gateway
Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting
specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS
lookupisr outedthroughthisc onnection.
DNSS
ervers Selecting Obtain
DNS server address automatically results
in the
DNS servers
being assigned by
the
WAN DHCP server to
be
used
for
outbound DNS lookups
over the connection. (The DNS servers are obtained along with the WAN IP
addressa ssignedfromtheD HCPs erver.
When Use the following DNS server address(es) is
selected, you
may
enter
custom DNS server addresses for this
WAN
connection into DNS
the Server
1
andD
NSS erver2 fields.
9.1.3 PPPoEConnection
This connection method is suitable if your ISP provides a login ID/password to connect via
PPPoE.
PPPoES
ettings
NAT allows substituting the
real
address
in
a packet with a mapped address
RoutingM
ode that is routable on the destination network. By clicking the help
icon
in
this
field,y ouc and isplaytheIPF orwardingo ption,ify ourn etworkr equiresit.
Password
ServiceN
ame Servicen
ameisp
rovidedb
ytheISP.
(Optional) Note:L
eavet hisf ieldb
lanku
nlessitisp
rovidedb
yy
ourISP.
IPA
ddress Ify ourISPp
rovidesa
P
PPoEIPa
ddress,e
nterith
ere.
(Optional) Note:L
eavet hisf ieldb
lanku
nlessitisp
rovidedb
yy
ourISP.
Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for
DNS lookups. This
setting
specifies the
DNS (Domain Name System) servers to
be used
when a DNS
lookupisr outedthroughthisc onnection.
Selecting Obtain DNS server address automatically results in the DNS
servers being assigned by the WAN DHCP server
to
be
used
for
outbound
DNSS
ervers
DNS lookups over
the
connection. (The DNS
servers are obtained along
with
theW
ANIPa ddressa ssignedfromtheD HCPs erver.)
When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you may
enter custom DNS server addresses for this
WAN
connection
into DNS
the
Server1 a
ndD
NSS erver2 fields.
9.1.4 L2TPConnection
L2TP has all the compatibility and convenience of
PPTP with
greater
security.
Combine
this
withIPsecfora g
oodb alanceb etweene aseo
fu
sea nds ecurity.
L2TPS
ettings
NAT
allows
substituting
the
real
address
in
a packet
with
a mapped
address
that
is
RoutingM
ode routable
on
the
destination
network.
By
clicking
the
help
icon
in
this
field,
you
can
displaytheIPF
orwardingo
ption,ify ourn
etworkr equiresit.
Enter
the
required
information
in
these
fields
in
order
to
connect
via
L2TP
to
your
L2TPU
sername/
ISP.
Password
Thep
arameterv aluesa
red
eterminedb
ya
ndc anb
eo
btainedfromy ourISP.
ConfirmL
2TP
Verifyy ourp
asswordb
ye
nteringita
gaininthisfield.
Password
ServerIP
L2TPs ervera
ddressisa p
arameterw hichisp rovidedb yy ourISP.
Address/H
ost Note:L eavet hisf ieldb
lanku nlessitisp
rovidedb yy ourISP.
ype Your ISP will also indicate whether the server IP address is Dynamic or Static.
AddressT
Pleasec lickthea
ppropriatev alue.
ervers Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting
DNSS
specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS
lookupisr outedthroughthisc onnection.
Selecting Obtain DNS server
address automatically results
in
the
DNS
servers
assigned by the PPPoE server to be used for outbound DNS lookups over the
WANc onnection.
(The
DNS servers are
obtained along with the
WAN IP
address assigned
from the
PPPoEs erver.)
When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you can enter
custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1
andD
NSs erver2 fields.
9.1.5 GREConnection
This connection method is suitable if your ISP provides a static WAN IP and Tunnel IP
via
GRE.
L2TPS
ettings
NAT
allows
substituting
the
real
address
in
a packet
with
a mapped
address
that
is
RoutingM
ode routable
on
the
destination
network.
By
clicking
the
help
icon
in
this
field,
you
can
displaytheIPF
orwardingo
ption,ify ourn
etworkr equiresit.
WANIPA ddress These settings allow you to specify the information required in order to
/S
ubnetM ask/ communicate on the Internet via a fixed Internet IP address. The information is
DefaultG
ateway typically d
etermined b
y a
nd c
an b
e o
btained f
romthe I
SP.
RemoteG
RE
Thisfielda
llowsy outoe
ntertheIPa
ddresso
fther emoteG
RE.
Host
TunnelL
ocalIP
This
field
allows
you
to
enter
the
IP
address
of
the
local
tunnel
for
the
GRE
tunnel
Address connection.
TunnelR emote This field allows you to enter the IP address of the remote tunnel for the GRE
IPA
ddress tunnelc onnection.
Each ISP may provide a set of DNS servers for DNS lookups. This setting
specifies the DNS (Domain Name System) servers to be used when a DNS
lookupisr outedthroughthisc onnection.
Selecting Obtain DNS server
address automatically results
in
the
DNS
servers
assigned by the PPPoE server to be used for outbound DNS lookups over the
DNSS
ervers WANc onnection.
(The
DNS servers are
obtained along with the
WAN IP
address assigned
from the
PPPoEs erver.)
When Use the following DNS server address(es) is selected, you can enter
custom DNS server addresses for this WAN connection into the DNS server 1
andD
NSs erver2 fields.
9.2 CellularW
AN
Toa ANs ettings,c lickN
ccessc ellularW etwork>WAN>Details.
WANC
onnectionS
tatus
This is
the
International Mobile
Subscriber
Identity
which
uniquely
identifies
the
SIM
IMSI
card.T hisisa pplicableto3 Gm
odemso nly.
ICCID
Thisisa
u
niquen
umbera
ssignedtoa
S
IMc ardu
sedina
c ellulard
evice.
Some Pepwave routers support both HSPA and EV-DO. For Sprint or Verizon
Wireless EV-DO users, a unique
MEID identifier
code (in hexadecimal format) is
used
MEID
by the carrier to associate the EV-DO device with the user. This information is
presentedinh exa ndd ecimalformat.
IMEI Thisistheu
niqueIDforidentifyingthem
odeminG
SM/HSPAm
ode.
ConnectionS
ettings
WAN
Connection
Indicatea n amey ouw
ishtog
ivethisW
ANc onnection
Name
This option
allows
you
to
select
the routing method
to be
used
in
routing
IP
frames
via
the
WAN connection.
The mode
can
be
either
NAT
(Network
Address Translation)
or
IPF
orwarding.
RoutingM
ode
In the case if you need to choose IP Forwarding for your scenario. Click the
buttontoe nableIPF orwarding.
If this is checked, the connection will be working independent from other Backup
Independent
WAN connections. Those in Backup Priority will ignore the status of this WAN
fromB
ackup
connection, and will be used
when none of
the
other
higher
priority
connections are
WANs available.
If
this
is
checked, the
connection will
disconnect
when
idle
after
the
configured
Time
IdleD
isconnect value.
Thiso ptionisd
isabledb yd
efault.
CellularS
ettings
IIndicate
which SIM card this
cellular WAN will
use. Only applies to
cellular
WAN with
redundant SIM cards. For
routers that support the SIM
Injector,
you
may
select
the
SIMC
ard “Use
Remote SIM Only” to
provision a SIM
from a SIM Injector.
Further details
on
the
SIMInjectorfoundisa vailableh ere:h ttps://www.peplink.com/products/sim-injector/.
PreferredS
IM
If
“B
oth
SIMs” were
selected
on
the
above
field,
then
you
can
designate
the
priority
Card oftheS
IMc ards lotsh
ere.
If “U
se Remote SIM Only” is selected in the SIM card section, the Remote SIM
Settingsw illb
es hown.
RemoteS
IM
Settings
Youm ayn eedtoe nablether emoteS IMH osts ettingsintheR emoteS IM
management,s eethes ection2 2.10o rA
ppendixB form
ored etailso nF usionSIM.
Afterthat,c licko n“ S
cann earbyr emoteS IMs erver”tos howthes erialn umber(s)
ofthec onnectedS IMInjector(s).
Ify ouw
anttos electa s pecificS
IM,intheC ellularS ettings,type“ : ” a
ndthenthe
numbero ftheS
IMs lot,e g.1111-2222-3333:7.
This drop-down menu allows restricting cellular to particular band. Click the
LTE/3G
buttontoe
nablethes electiono
fs pecificb
ands.
Choose from PAP Only or CHAP Only to use those authentication methods
Authentication exclusively.S
electA
utotoa
utomaticallyc hoosea
na
uthenticationm
ethod.
APN/L
ogin/ When Auto is selected, the information in these fields will be filled automatically.
Password/ Select Custom to customize these parameters. The parameter values are
SIMP IN determinedb ya ndc anb eo btainedfromtheISP.
Bandwidth Check the box Enable to enable bandwidth usage monitoring on this WAN
Allowance connection for
each billing
cycle.
When this
option
is not
enabled,
bandwidth
usage
Monitor ofe
ach m
onth i
ss till b
eing t
racked b
utn o a
ction w
ill b
e t
aken.
If
email
notification is enabled, you will
be notified by
email when usage hits 75% and
95% of the monthly allowance. If Disconnect when usage hits 100% of
monthly
Action allowance is checked, this
WAN connection will
be
disconnected automatically when
the usage hits
the
monthly allowance. It
will
not
resume connection unless this
option
hasb eenturnedo ffo
rtheu sageh asb eenr esetw hena n
ewb
illingc ycles tarts.
StartD
ay Thiso ptiona llowsy outod efinew
hichd
ayo
fthem
onthe
achb
illingc ycleb
egins.
Monthly
This field is for defining the maximum bandwidth usage allowed for the WAN
Allowance connectione achm onth.
SignalThresholdS
ettings
If signal threshold is defined, this connection will be treated as down when a weaker than
thresholds ignalisd etermined.
Thefollowingv aluesa reu sedb ythethresholds cale:
To define the threshold manually using specific signal strength values, please click on the
questionM arka ndthefollowingfieldw ev isible.
illb
HealthC
heckS
ettings
HealthC This
heck setting
allows you to
specify
the
health
check method for
the
cellular connection.
Method Available options are Disabled, Ping, DNS Lookup, HTTP, and SmartCheck. The
ethodisD
defaultm NSL ookup.S eeSection1 0.4forc onfigurationd etails.
If
a health
check test
cannot
be
completed
within
the
specified
amount
of
time,
the
test
Timeout
willb sfailed.
etreateda
HealthC
heck
Thisisthetimeintervalb
etweene ealthc hecktest.
achh
Interval
HealthC
heck
Thisisthen
umbero
fc onsecutivec heckfailuresb
eforetreatinga
c onnectiona own.
sd
Retries
Recovery This
is
the
number of
responses
required
after
a health
check
failure
before
treating
a
Retries connectiona su gain.
pa
DynamicD
NSS
ettings
This setting
specifies
the
dynamic DNS service provider
to
be
used
for
the
WAN
based
ons upportedd ynamicD NSs ervicep
roviders:
● changeip.com
DynamicD
NS ● dyndns.org
Service
● no-ip.org
Provider ● tzo.com
● DNS-O-Matic
SelectD
isabledtod eeS
isablethisfeature.S ection9
.5forc onfigurationd
etails.
MTU
This field is for specifying the Maximum Transmission Unit value of the WAN
MTU connection. An excessive MTU value can cause file downloads stall shortly after
connected.Y oum ayc onsulty ourISPforthec onnection'sM
TUv alue.
9.3 Wi-FiW
AN
Toa
ccessW ANs ettings,c lickN
i-FiW etwork>WAN>Details.
WANC
onnectionS
ettings
WANC
onnection
Entera
n
ametor epresentthisW
ANc onnection.
Name
Operating
Clickthed
rop-downm
enutoa
pplya
times cheduletothisinterface.
Schedule
If
this
is
checked,
the
connection
will
be
working
independent
from
other
Backup
Independentf rom
WAN connections. Those in Backup Priority will
ignore
the
status
of
this
WAN
BackupW
ANs connection,
and
will
be
used when
none of
the other higher priority
connections
area
vailable.
This setting specifies the state of the WAN connection while in standby. The
StandbyS
tate available options areRemain
Connected (hot
standby) Disconnect
and (cold
standby).
This
setting specifies
the
maximum transmission unit.
By
default, MTU is
set to
MTU Custom 1440. You may adjust the MTU value by editing the text field. Click
Default to restore the
default
MTU
value. Select Auto and the appropriate MTU
value will be automatically detected. The auto-detection will
run each time the
WANc onnectione
stablishes
Replyt oICMP
If this setting is disabled, the WAN connection will not respond to ICMP ping
PING requests.B yd
efault,thiss ettingise nabled.
Wi-FiW
ANS
ettings
Determine whether the channel will
be
automatically
selected.
If
you
select
custom,
thefollowingtablew
illa
ppear:
Channel
Selection
Selecting
Auto
will
enable
the router to
automatically determine
the
best data rate,
DataR
ate
whilem
anuallys electinga
r atew illforced evicestoc onnectu
singthefixedr ate.
If
you
are
setting
up
a network
with
many
Wi-Fi
devices
in
close
proximity,
then
you
OutputP
ower can
configure
the
output
power
here.
Click
the
“boost”
button
for
additional
power.
However,w
iththato
ptionticked,o
utputp
owerm
aye
xceedlocalr egulatorylimits.
Roaming Checking this box will enable Wi-Fi roaming. Click the icon for additional
options.
Connectt oA
ny This option is to specify whether the Wi-Fi WAN will connect to any
open
mode
OpenM
odeA P accessp ointsitfinds.
BeaconM
iss
Thiss etsthethresholdforthen
umbero
fm
issedb
eacons.
Counter
BandwidthA
llowanceM
onitor
If enabled, you will be notified by email when usage hits 75% and 95% of the
monthlya llowance.
Action If Disconnect when usage hits 100% of monthly allowance is checked, this
WAN connection will be disconnected automatically when the usage hits the
monthly allowance. It will not resume connection unless this option has been
turnedo ffo
rtheu
sageh
asb eenr esetw
hena n
ewb
illingc ycles tarts.
StartD
ay Thiso
ptiona
llowsy outod
efinew
hichd
ayo
fthem
onthe
achb
illingc ycleb
egins.
Monthly
This field is for defining the maximum bandwidth usage allowed for the WAN
Allowance connectione achm onth.
HealthC
heckS
ettings
This
setting specifies
the health check method for the
WAN
connection. This value
can be configured as Disabled, PING, DNS Lookup, or HTTP. The default
Method
method is DNS Lookup. For mobile Internet connections, the value of Method
canb ec onfigureda sD
isabledo rS
martCheck.
HealthC
heckD
isabled
When Disabled is chosen in the Method field,
the
WAN connection will
always
be
considered
as
up.
illN
Thec onnectionw OTb
etreateda sd
owninthee vento
fIPr outinge
rrors.
HealthC
heckM
ethod:P
ING
ICMP ping packets will be issued to test the connectivity with a configurable target IP address or
hostname. A WAN connection is considered as up if ping responses are received from either
one
or
botho
fthep
ingh
osts.
HealthC
heckM
ethod:D
NSL
ookup
DNS lookups will
be
issued to
test
connectivity
with
target DNS servers.
The
connection will
be treated
as
up
if
DNS
responses are
received from
one
or
both of
the
servers,
regardless
of
whether the
result
wasp ositiveo rn
egative.
This field allows you to specify two DNS hosts’ IP addresses with which
connectivityistob etestedv iaD NSL ookup.
Use
If first two DNS servers as
Health Check DNS Servers is checked, the first
two DNS servers will be the DNS lookup targets for checking a connection's
health. If
the box is
not
checked, Host 1 must
be
filled,
while a value for Host 2 is
optional.
HealthC
heck If Include public DNS servers is selected and no response is
received from all
DNSS ervers specified DNS servers, DNS lookups will also be issued to some public DNS
servers. A WAN connection will be treated as down only if there is also n
responser eceivedfromthep ublicD NSs ervers.
Connections will
be considered as
up if
DNS responses are
received from any one
of the health check DNS servers, regardless of a positive or
negative result. By
default, the first two DNS servers of
the WAN connection are used as
the health
checkD NSs ervers.
HealthC
heckM
ethod:H
TTP
HTTPc onnectionsw
illb
eissuedtotestc onnectivityw
ithc onfigurableU
RLsa
nds tringstom
atch.
HealthC
heck This setting specifies the time interval in seconds between ping or DNS lookup
Interval requests. T
he d
efault h
ealth c
heck i
nterval i
s5
s econds
.
This setting specifies the number of consecutive successful ping/DNS lookup
responses that must be received before the Pepwave MAX treats a previously
down WAN connection as
up again.
By
default, Recover
Retries is
set 3. Using
to
RecoveryR
etries
the default setting, a WAN connection
that
is
treated
as
down
will
be
considered
as up again upon receiving three consecutive successful ping/DNS lookup
responses.
DynamicD
NSS
ettings
This setting specifies the dynamic DNS service provider to be used for the
WAN.S upportedp rovidersa re:
● changeip.com
● dyndns.org
ServiceP
rovider
● no-ip.org
● tzo.com
● DNS-O-Matic
SelectD isabledtod isablethisfeature.
UserID/U
ser/
Thiss ettings pecifiesther egisteredu
sern
ameforthed
ynamicD
NSs ervice.
Email
Password/P
ass/
Thiss ettings pecifiesthep
asswordforthed
ynamicD
NSs ervice.
TZOK
ey
UpdateA
llH
osts Checkthisb
oxtoa
utomaticallyu
pdatea
llh
osts.
This
setting
specifies
a list
of hostnames or
domains to
be
associated
with
the
Hosts/D
omain publicInternetIPa
ddresso ftheW
ANc onnection.
ImportantN
ote
In
order to
use dynamic DNS services, appropriate hostname registration(s), as
well
as a valid
account
witha s upportedd ynamicD NSs ervicep rovider,a rer equired.
A
dynamic DNS update is
performed whenever a WAN’s IP
address is
changed, such as
when an
IP is
changeda ftera D HCPIPr efresho rr econnection.
Due to dynamic DNS service providers’ policies, a dynamic DNS host
expires
automatically when the
host record has not
been not
updated for
a long
time. Therefore, the Pepwave MAX performs an update
every2 3d ays,e venifa W
AN’sIPa ddressd idn otc hange.
9.3.1 CreatingW
i-FiC
onnectionProfiles
You can
manually create a profile
to
connect
to
a Wi-Fi
connection.
This
is
useful
for
creating
a profile for
connecting to
hidden-SSID access points. Network>WAN>Details>Create
Click
Profile…tog ets tarted.
Thisw
illo
pena
w
indows imilartotheo
nes hownb
elow
Wi-FiC
onnectionP
rofileS
ettings
Type Selectw
hetherthen
etworkw
illc onnecta
utomaticallyo
rm
anually.
NetworkN
ame
Entera
n
ametor epresentthisW
i-Fic onnection.
(SSID)
This option allows you to select which security policy is used for this wireless
network.A vailableo ptions:
● Open
● WPA3- Personal( AES:CCMP)
Security ● WPA2/WPA3- Personal( AES:CCMP)
● WPA2–
P
ersonal:A
ES:CCMP
● WPA2–
E
nterprise:A
ES:C
CMP
● WPA/W
PA2–
P
ersonal:T
KIP/AES:CCMP
● WPA/W
PA2–
E
Nterprise:T
KIP/AES:CCMP
9.4 WANH
ealthC
heck
To ensure traffic is routed to healthy WAN connections only, the Pepwave router can
periodically check the health of each WAN connection. The health check settings for each
WANc onnectionc anb eindependentlyc onfiguredv iaN etwork>WAN>Details.
HealthC
heckS
ettings
This
setting specifies
the health check method for the
WAN
connection. This value
can be configured as Disabled, PING, DNS Lookup, or HTTP. The default
Method
method is DNS Lookup. For mobile Internet connections, the value of Method
canb ec onfigureda sD
isabledo rS
martCheck.
HealthC
heckD
isabled
When Disabled is chosen in the Method field,
the
WAN connection will
always
be
considered
as
up.
illN
Thec onnectionw OTb
etreateda sd
owninthee vento
fIPr outinge
rrors.
HealthC
heckM
ethod:P
ING
ICMP ping packets will be issued to test the connectivity with a configurable target IP address or
hostname. A WAN connection is considered as up if ping responses are received from either
one
or
botho
fthep
ingh
osts.
HealthC
heckM
ethod:D
NSL
ookup
DNS lookups will
be
issued to
test
connectivity
with
target DNS servers.
The
connection will
be treated
as
up
if
DNS
responses are
received from
one
or
both of
the
servers,
regardless
of
whether the
result
wasp ositiveo rn
egative.
This field allows you to specify two DNS hosts’ IP addresses with which
connectivityistob etestedv iaD NSlookup.
Use
If first two DNS servers
as Health Check DNS Servers is checked, the
first
two DNS servers will be the DNS lookup targets for checking a connection's
health. If
the box
is
not
checked, Host
1 must
be filled,
while
a value Host
for 2 is
optional.
HealthC
heck If Include public DNS servers is selected and no response is
received
from all
DNSS ervers specified DNS servers, DNS lookups will also be issued to some public DNS
servers. A WAN connection will be treated as down only if there is also no
responser eceivedfromthep ublicD NSs ervers.
Connections will
be
considered as
up if
DNS responses are received from any
one
of the health check DNS servers, regardless of a positive or
negative
result.
By
default, the first
two
DNS
servers
of the WAN connection are used
as
the
health
checkD NSs ervers.
HealthC
heckM
ethod:H
TTP
HTTPc onnectionsw
illb
eissuedtotestc onnectivityw
ithc onfigurableU
RLsa atch.
nds tringstom
WANS
ettings>WANE
dit>HealthC
heckS
ettings>URL1
The URL will be retrieved when performing an
HTTP health check. When String
URL1 to
Match is
left
blank, a health check will
pass if
the HTTP return code is
between
200 and 299 (Note: HTTP redirection codes 301 or
302 are treated as
failures).
When String to
Match is
filled,
a health
check will pass if
the HTTP return code is
between2 00a nd2 99a ndiftheH TTPr esponsec ontentc ontainsthes tring.
WANS
ettings>WANE
dit>HealthC
heckS
ettings>URL2
URL2
IfU
RL2isa
lsop
rovided,a
h
ealthc heckw
illp
assife
ithero
neo
fthetestsp
assed.
OtherH
ealthC
heckS
ettings
HealthC
heck
This setting specifies the time interval in seconds between ping or DNS lookup
Interval requests.T
hed ealthc heckintervalis5s
efaulth econds.
This setting specifies the number of consecutive successful ping/DNS lookup
responses that must be received before the Pepwave router treats a previously
down WAN connection as
up again.
By
default, Recover
Retries is
set 3. Using
to
RecoveryR
etries
the default setting, a WAN connection
that
is
treated
as
down
will be
considered
as up again upon receiving three consecutive successful ping/DNS lookup
responses.
AutomaticP
ublicD
NSS
erverC
hecko
nD
NST
estF
ailure
9.5 DynamicD
NSS
ettings
Pepwave routers are capable of registering the
domain name
relationships to
dynamic DNS
service providers. Through registration with dynamic DNS service provider(s), the default
public
Internet IP
address
of
each WAN connection can
be
associated with
a host
name. With
dynamic DNS service enabled for a WAN connection, you can connect to your WAN's IP
address from
the
external,
even
if
its
IP
address is
dynamic. You must register for
an
account
fromthelistedd ynamicD NSs ervicep rovidersb eforee nablingthiso ption.
If the WAN connection's IP address is a reserved private IP address (i.e., behind a NAT
router),thep ublicIPo
fe
achW ANw illb
ea utomaticallyr eportedtotheD NSs ervicep rovider.
Either upon a change in IP addresses or every 23 days without link reconnection, the
Pepwave router will connect to the dynamic DNS
service provider to
perform an
IP
address
updatew ithinthep rovider’sr ecords.
The settings for dynamic DNS service provider(s) and the association of hostname(s) are
configured via Network>WAN>Details>Dynamic DNS Service Provider/Dynamic DNS
Settings.
DynamicD
NSS
ettings
This setting specifies the dynamic DNS service provider to be used
for
the
WANb asedo ns upportedd ynamicD NSs ervicep roviders:
● changeip.com
● dyndns.org
● no-ip.org
● tzo.com
DynamicD
NS ● DNS-O-Matic
● Others…
Support custom Dynamic DNS servers by
entering
its
URL.
Works
with
any
servicec ompatiblew ithD
ynDNSA PI.
SelectD
isabledtod
isablethisfeature.
AccountN ame/
Thiss ettings pecifiesther egisteredu
sern
ameforthed
ynamicD
NSs ervice.
EmailA
ddress
Password/T ZO
Thiss ettings pecifiesthep
asswordforthed
ynamicD
NSs ervice.
Key
This field allows you to specify a list of host names or domains to be
Hosts/D
omain associated with
the
public Internet
IP address of
the
WAN connection. If
you
needtoe nterm orethano neh ost,u
sea c arriager eturntos eparatethem.
ImportantN
ote
Ino
rdertou
sed ynamicD NSs ervices,a ppropriateh ostn amer egistration(s)a nda v alida
ccountw itha
supportedd ynamicD NSs ervicep
rovidera rer equired.A d ynamicD NSu pdateisp
erformedw henever
aW
AN’sIPa ddressc hanges( e.g.,theIPisc hangeda ftera D
HCPIPr efresh,r econnection,e tc.).D ue
tod
ynamicD NSs ervicep roviders’p olicy,a d
ynamicD NSh ostw illa
utomaticallye xpireiftheh
ost
recordh asn otb
eenu pdatedfora
longtime.T hereforetheP epwaver outerp erformsa nu
pdatee very
23d ays,e venifa
W
AN’sIPa ddressh asn otc hanged.
10 AdvancedWi-FiSettings
Wi-Fi settings can be configured at Advanced>Wi-Fi Settings (or AP>Settings on some
models).N ote:M
enusd isplayedc anv aryb odel.
ym
APS
ettings
You
can select
the
wireless
networks
for
2.4
GHz
or
5 GHz
separately
for
each
SSID
SSID.
This drop-down menu specifies the national/regional regulations which the
Wi-Fir adios houldfollow.
● If a North American region is selected, RF channels 1 to 11 will be
available and the maximum transmission power
will
be
26 dBm (400
Operating mW).
Country
● If
European
region
is
selected,
RF
channels 1 to
13
will
be
available.
Them aximumtransmissionp owerw
illb
e2
0d
Bm( 100m W).
Note: Users are required to choose an option suitable to local laws and
regulations.
Preferred
Indicatethep
referredfrequencytou
seforc lientstoc onnect.
Frequency
ImportantN
ote
Per FCC
regulation, the
country selection
is
not
available
on
all
models
marketed
in
the
US.
AllU
Sm odelsa refixedtoU
Sc hannelso nly.
APS
ettings( part2
)
This option allows you to specify whether 802.11b and/or 802.11g client
Protocol association requests will be accepted. Available options are 802.11ng and
802.11na. Byd efault,8 02.11ngiss elected.
Available options are 20 MHz, 40 MHz, and Auto (20/40 MHz) . Default is
ChannelW
idth
Auto( 20/40M Hz),w hicha llowsb othw idthstob eu
seds imultaneously.
This option allows you to select which 802.11 RF channel will be utilized.
Channel
Channel1 ( 2.412G
Hz)iss electedb yd
efault.
AutoC
hannel
Indicatethetimeo
fd
aya
tw
hichu
pdatea
utomaticc hannels election.
Update
This option is for specifying the transmission output power for the
Wi-Fi AP.
There are
4 relative power
levels – Max, High, Mid, and
available Low. The
OutputP
ower
actual output power will be bound by the regulatory limits of the selected
country.
ClientS
ignal
This setting determines the maximum strength at which the Wi-Fi AP can
Strength
broadcast
Threshold
Maximumn umber
This setting determines the maximum number of clients that can
connect
to
ofc
lients thisW
i-Fifrequency.
Advanced Wi-Fi
AP settings
can
be
displayed by clicking
the on
the
top right-hand
corner
of the Wi-Fi AP Settings section, which can be found at AP>Settings. Other models will
display a separate section called Wi-Fi AP Advanced Settings, which can be found at
Advanced>Wi-FiS ettings.
AdvancedA
PS
ettings
This field specifies the VLAN ID to tag to management traffic, such as
communication traffic
between the
AP
and the AP Controller.
The
value
is
zero
ManagementV
LAN
byd efault,w hichm eansthatn oV LANtaggingw illb
ea
pplied.
ID
Note: Change this value with caution as alterations may result in loss of
connectiontotheA PC ontroller.
Operating
Choose from
the schedules
that
you
have
defined
in
System>Schedule. Select
Schedule thes chedulefortheintegratedA Ptofollowfromthed rop-downm
enu.
This
option is
for
setting
the
transmit
bit
rate
for
sending
a beacon.
By
default,
BeaconR
ateA
1Mbpsiss elected.
This option is for setting the time interval between each beacon. By default,
BeaconIntervalA
100msiss elected.
This field allows you to set the frequency for the beacon to include delivery
DTIMA
traffic indication messages. The interval is measured in milliseconds. The
defaultv alueiss etto1 m s.
The RTS (Request to Clear) threshold determines the level of connection
RTST
hresholdA
required
before
the
AP
starts
sending
data.
The
recommended
standard
of
the
RTSthresholdisa
round5
00.
Fragmentation This
setting
determines the
maximum
size
of
a packet
before
it
gets
fragmented
Threshold
A
intom
ultiplep ieces.
Distance/T
ime
Select the range you wish to cover with your Wi-Fi, and the router will
make
Convertor recommendationsfortheS lotT imea ndA CKT imeout.
This field is for specifying the unit wait time before transmitting a packet. By
SlotT
imeA
default,thisfieldiss etto9 µ
s.
This field is for setting the wait time to receive an acknowledgement packet
ACKT
imeoutA
beforep erforminga r etransmission.B yd efault,thisfieldiss etto4
8µ
s.
FrameA
ggregation
This option allows you to enable frame aggregation to increase transmission
A
throughput.
A
- A
dvancedfeature,p
leasec lickthe b
uttono ctivate.
nthetopr ight-handc ornertoa
WebA
dministrationS
ettings
Enable Tickingthisb
oxe
nablesw
eba
dmina
ccessforA
Pslocatedo
ntheW
AN.
WebA
ccess Determines
whether
the
web
admin
portal
can
be
accessed
through
HTTP
or
Protocol HTTPS
ManagementP
ort Determinesthep
orta
tw
hichthem
anagementU
Ic anb
ea
ccessed.
AdminU
sername Determinestheu
sernametob
eu
sedforloggingintothew
eba
dminp
ortal
AdminP
assword Determinesthep
asswordforthew
eba
dminp
ortalo
ne
xternalA
P.
Wi-Fi WAN settings can be configured at Advanced>Wi-Fi Settings (or Advanced>Wi-Fi
WANo odels).
rs omem
Wi-FiW
ANS
ettings
Available options are 20/40 MHz and 20 MHz. Default is 20/40 MHz,
which
ChannelW
idth
allowsb
othw idthstob eu seds imultaneously.
This option allows you to select a specific bit rate for data
transfer
over
the
BitR
ate
device’sW i-Fin etwork.B yd efault,A utoiss elected.
This option is for specifying the transmission output power for the
Wi-Fi AP.
There are 4 relative power
levels – Max, High, Mid, and
available Low. The
actual output power will be bound by the regulatory limits of the selected
OutputP
ower country.
Note that selecting the Boost option may cause the MAX’s radio output to
exceedlocalr egulatorylimits.
11 MediaFastConfiguration
ec onfiguredfromtheA
MediaFasts ettingsc anb dvancedm
enu.
11.1 S
ettingU
pM
ediaFastC
ontentC
aching
Toa ediaFastc ontentc achings ettings,s electA
ccessM dvanced>CacheC
ontrol
MediaFast
Enable Clickthec heckboxtoe
nableM
ediaFastc ontentc aching.
ChoosetoC
Domains/IP acheo na
lld
omains,o
re
nterd
omainn amesa ndthenc hoose
eitherW
hitelist( cachethes pecifiedd
omainso rB
nly)o lacklist( don
otc ache
Addresses thes pecifiedd omains).
SourceIP
Thiss ettinga llowsc achingtob
ee
nabledo nc ustoms ubnetso nly.
Subnet If" Any"iss elected,thenc achingw illa
pplytoa lls ubnets.
The Secure Content
Caching menu operates
identically to MediaFast
the menu,
except it
is
fors ecurec ontentc achtinga ccessiblethroughh ttps://.
In
order for
Mediafast devices to
cache and
deliver HTTPS content,
every
client
needs
to
have
then ecessaryc ertificatesinstalled*.
*Seeh
ttps://forum.peplink.com/t/certificate-installation-for-mediafast-https-caching/
CacheC
ontrol
Check
these boxes to
cache the
listed
content
types
or
leave
boxes
unchecked
to
disable
ContentT
ype cachingforthelistedtypes.
CacheL Enter a file extension, such as JPG or DOC. Then enter a lifetime in days to specify how
ifetime
long
files with that
extension will
be
cached. Add or
delete entries using the
controls on the
Settings right.
11.2 S
chedulingC
ontentP
refetching
Content prefetching allows
you
to
download content
on
a schedule that
you define, which can
help to preserve network bandwidth during busy times and keep costs down. To access
MediaFastc ontentp refetchings ettings,s electA
dvanced> PrefetchS chedule.
PrefetchS
cheduleS
ettings
Name Thisfieldd
isplaysthen
ameg
iventothes cheduledd
ownload.
NextR
un
These fields
display
the
date
and
time
of
the
next
and
most
recent
occurrences
of
Time/LastR
un
thes cheduledd ownload.
Time
Check this
field
to
ensure
that the most recent download took as
long as
expected
to complete. A value that is too low might indicate an incomplete download or
LastD
uration
incorrectly specified download target, while
a value that
is
too
long
could mean
a
downloadw itha nincorrectlys pecifiedtargeto rs toptime.
Result Thisfieldindicatesw
hetherd
ownloadsa
reinp
rogress( )o
rc omplete( ) .
Check this field to ensure that the most recent download file size is within the
expected range. A value that
is
too
low might indicate an incomplete download or
LastD
ownload incorrectly specified download target, while a value
that is
too
long could mean
a
download with an incorrectly specified target or
stop time. This field
is
also
useful
forq
uicklys eeingw hichd ownloadsa rec onsumingthem osts torages pace.
Tob
egina
s cheduledd
ownloadimmediately,c lick .
Actions Toc ancela
s cheduledd
ownload,c lick .
Toe
dita
s cheduledd
ownload,c lick .
Tod
eletea
s cheduledd
ownload,c lick .
Click
to
begin
creating
a new
scheduled
download.
Clicking
the
button
will
cause
thefollowings creentoa
ppear:
NewS
chedule
Simplyp
rovidether equestedinformationtoc reatey ours chedule.
To clear all cached content, click this button. Note that this action cannot be
ClearW
ebC
ache
undone.
ClearS
tatistics Toc leara
llp
refetcha
nds tatusp
ages tatistics,c lickthisb
utton.
11.3 V
iewingM
ediaFastS
tatistics
Tog
etd
etailso
ns toragea
ndb sage,s electS
andwidthu tatus>MediaFast.
12 ContentHub
ContentHub allows you to
deliver webpages and
applications
to
users
connected to
the SSID
using the
local storage on
your router,
like
the
Max
HD2/HD4 with Mediafast, which
can store
up
to
8GB of
media. Users will
be able
to
access news,
articles,
videos, and access your web
appw ithoutthen eedforinterneta ccess.
TheC ontentHubc anb eu sedtop rovideinfotainmenttoc onnectedu serso
ntransport.
Toa
ccessC avigatetoA
ontentHub,n dvanced>
C
ontentHuba
ndc hecktheE ox.
nable b
On an external server, configure content
(a
website
or
application)
that
will
be
synced
to
the
ContentHub.F ore xample,a nh
tml5w ebsite.
Toc onfigurea
w
ebsiteo
ra
pplicationa
sc ontent,followthes tepsb
elow.
ConfigureawebsiteforContentHub
This option allows you to sync a website to the Pepwave router. This website will then be
published with the
specified domain from the
router
itself
and
makes the
content
available to
thec lientv iatheH TTP/HTTPSp rotocol.
OnlyF TPs ynciss upportedforthistypeo fC ontentHubc ontent.
Thec ontents houldb eu
ploadedtoa nF TPs erverb eforey ous yncitwithContentHub.
ClickN
ewW
ebsitea
nda
w
indoww
iththefollowingc onfigurationo
ptionsw
illa
ppear:
Schedule
Active Checkingtheb
oxtogglesthea
ctivationo
fthec ontent.
Type Selectthetypeo
fc ontent:W
ebsiteo
rA
pplication.
Protocol Configurethep
rotocoltob
eu
sed:H
TTP,H
TTPSo
rb
oth.
Domain/Path EntertheU
RLfortheC
ontenHubtou
sea
sthed
omainn
ameforc lienta
ccess
(sucha
sh
ttp://mytest.com).
Method pplicableforA
Onlya pplicationtypec ontent.C
hooseb
etweens ynco
rfileu
pload.
Enterthed
etailso
fthes erverthatthec ontentw
illb
ed
ownloadedfrom.E
nter
Source credentialsu nderU sernamea ndP assword.
Thisfieldd
eterminesh
owo
ftenther outerw
ills earchforu
pdatestothes ource
Period
content.
Bandwidth
Seta
b
andwidthlimitforc lients.
Limit
Click“ S
ave&
A
pplyN
ow”toa
ctivatethec hanges.A
s creenshoto
fthed
isplaya
fter
configurationiss hownb elow:
The content will be synced regularly according to the time set in the Period that was
configurede arlier.
If you want to activate the sync manually, you can click the “ ” icon. The “Status”
column will display the sync progress. When the sync is completed, a summary will be
displayed,a ss howninthes creenshotb elow:
To access the content, open a browser in
the
MFA’s
client
and
enter
the
domain
details
that
werec onfigurede arlier( sucha
sh ttp://mytest.com).
Configurea
na
pplicationf orC
ontentHub
MediaFast routers allow you
to
configure
and
publish
any
application
from
the
router
itself
by
usingo
neo
fthes upportedframeworksb elow:
● Python( version2 .7.12)
● Ruby( version2 .3.3)
● Node.js( version6 .9.2)
Installthed
esiredframeworku
nder“ PackageM
anager”a
ss hownb
elow:
Afterinstallingtheframework,c hangethe” Type”to“ Application”a
ndc onfigurethew
ebsite.
Thes ettingisthes amea stheW ebsitetype( refertothed escriptioninthes ectiona bove).
Applicationtypec ontentn eedtob ep ackeda se xplainedb elow:
1. Implement two
bash script
files,
start.sh and stop.sh in
the root
folder,
to
start
and
stop
your
application. The MediaFast router will
only
execute start.sh and
stop.sh when the
correspondingw ebsiteise nableda ndd isabledr espectively.
2. Compressthea pplicationfilesa ndtheb ashs criptto.tar.gzformat.
3. Uploadthistarfiletother outer.
13 Docker
MediaFaste
nabledr outersc anh
ostD
ockerc ontainersw
henr unningF
irmware7
.1o
rlater.
Dockerisa
no
penp
latformford
eveloping,s hipping,a
ndr unninga
pplications.
From Firmware
version
7.1.0
and
upwards, it
is
possible
to
install
and
run
Docker
Containers
ony ourP epwaver outersw
ithM ediaFast,s ucha stheM
AXH D2a ndtheM AXH
D4.
Due to
the
nature of
Docker and
its
unlimited
variables, this
feature
is
supported
by
Pepwave
uptothep ointo
fc reatinga r unningD ockerC ontainer.
Informationa
boutD
ockerc anb
efoundo
ntheD
ockerD
ocumentations ite:
https://docs.docker.com/2
This will allow you to run a file sharing platform (ownCloud), a web server (WordPress,
Joomla!) , a learning platform (Moodle), or a visualisation tool for viewing large scale data
(Kibana).
When creating a new Docker Container, the Pepwave
router
will
search
through
the
Docker
Hubr epository.h ttps://hub.docker.com/explore/7
Ford
etailedc onfigurationinstructions,r efertoo
urk nowledgeb
ase:
https://forum.peplink.com/t/how-to-run-a-docker-application-on-a-peplink-mediafast-router/160
21
14 KVM
MediaFaste nabledr outersn
ows upportK VM.U sersw
illh
avetod
ownloada ndinstallV irtual
MachineM anagertom anagetheK VMv irtualm
achines.T hroughthis,u
sersa
rea
bleto
virtualisea
L
inuxe
nvironment.
Ford
etailedc onfigurationinstructions,r efertoo
urk nowledgeb
asea
rticles:
1. Howt oinstalla
V
irtualM
achineo
nP
eplink/Pepwave- M
ediaFast/ContentHub
Routers
2. Howt oInstallV
irtualM
achinew
ithU
SBs
torageo
nP
eplink/Pepwave-
MediaFast/ContentHubR outers
15 BandwidthBondingSpeedFusionTM/
PepVPN
Pepwave bandwidth bonding SpeedFusionTM is our patented technology that enables our
SD-WAN routers to
bond
multiple
Internet
connections
to
increase
site-to-site
bandwidth and
reliability. SpeedFusion functionality securely connects your Pepwave router to another
Pepwave or
Peplink
device
(Peplink Balance 210/310/380/580/710/1350 only).
Data,
voice, or
video communications between these locations are kept confidential across the public
Internet.
Bandwidth bonding SpeedFusionTM is specifically designed for multi-WAN environments. In
case of failures and network congestion at
one
or
more
WANs,
other
WANs can
be
used
to
continuec arryingthen etworktraffic.
Different models of our SD-WAN routers have different numbers of site-to-site connections
allowed. End-users who need to have more site-to-site connections can purchase a
SpeedFusionlicensetoincreasethen umbero fs ite-to-sitec onnectionsa llowed.
Pepwave routers can aggregate all WAN connections’ bandwidth
for
routing
SpeedFusionTM
traffic. Unless all
the
WAN
connections of
one
site
are
down,
Pepwave routers
can
keep
the
VPNu pa ndr unning.
VPN bandwidth bonding is
supported in
Firmware 5.1
or
above. All
available bandwidth will
be
utilized to
establish
the
VPN tunnel,
and all
traffic
will
be
load
balanced at
packet
level
across
alllinks.V PNb andwidthb ondingise
nabledb yd
efault.
15.1 PepVPN
To configure PepVPN and SpeedFusion, navigate to Advanced>SpeedFusion™ or
Advanced>PepVPN.
The local LAN subnet
and subnets behind the
LAN under Static
(defined Route on
the
LAN
settings page) will be advertised to the VPN. All VPN members (branch offices and
headquarters)w illb
ea
bletor outetolocals ubnets.
Note that all LAN subnets and the subnets behind them must be unique. Otherwise, VPN
membersw illn otb
ea bletoa
ccesse acho ther.
All
data can
be
routed over
the
VPN using the
256-bit AES encryption standard. To
configure,
navigate to Advanced>SpeedFusion™ or Advanced>PepVPN and click the New Profile
button to
create
a new VPN profile
(you may have to
first
save
the displayed default profile in
order to access the New Profile button). Each profile specifies the
settings
for
making VPN
connection with one remote Pepwave or
Peplink device. Note
that
available
settings vary
by
model.
A list of defined
SpeedFusion connection profiles and a Link Failure
Detection Time option
will be shown. Click the New Profile
button to
create a new VPN connection profile
for
making
a
VPN connection to
a remote Pepwave or
Peplink device via
the
available WAN connections.
Eachp rofileisform akinga V
PNc onnectionw itho
ner emoteP epwaveo rP
eplinkD evice.
PepVPNP
rofileS
ettings
This field
is
for
specifying
a name
to
represent this
profile.
The
name
can
be
any
Name combination of alphanumeric characters (0-9,
A-Z, a-z),
underscores
(_),
dashes
(-),a
nd/orn on-leading/trailings paces( ) .
When this
box
is
checked,
this
VPN
connection
profile
will
be
enabled.
Otherwise,
Active
itw
illb
ed isabled.
By default, VPN traffic is encrypted with 256-bit AES. If
Off
is
selected
on
both
Encryption
sideso fa
V
PNc onnection,n oe
ncryptionw illb
ea
pplied.
Select By
from Remote
ID
Only, Preshared
Key, or
X.509
to
specify
the
method
Authentication the
Pepwave
MAX
will
use
to
authenticate
peers.
When By
selecting Remote
ID
Only,b
es uretoe
ntera
u
niquep umberintheR
eerIDn emoteIDfield.
This optional field becomes available when Remote ID / Pre-shared Key is
selected as the Pepwave router’s VPN Authentication method, as explained
above. Pre-shared Key defines the pre-shared key used
for
this
particular VPN
connection. The VPN connection's session key will be further protected by the
RemoteID/ pre-shared key. The connection will
be
up
only
if
the
pre-shared keys on
each side
match.W henthep eerisr unningfirmware5 .0+,thiss ettingw
illb
eignored.
Pre-sharedK
ey
Enter Remote IDs
either
by typing
out
each Remote ID
and
Pre-shared Key,
or
by
pasting a CSV.
If
you
wish
to paste
a CSV,
click
the
icon
next
to
the
“Remote
ID/P
resharedK ey”s etting.
Remote
These optional fields become available when X.509
is
selected
as
the
Pepwave
ID/Remote MAX’s VPN authentication method, as explained above. To authenticate VPN
Certificate connections using X.509
certificates, copy
and
paste
certificate
details
into
these
fields.
To
get
more information on
a listed
X.509 certificate,
click Show
the Details
linkb
elowthefield.
AllowS
hared When this option is enabled, the
router
will
allow
multiple
peers
to
run
using
the
RemoteID samer emoteID.
Check this box to allow the local DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
NATM
ode remote
peer. When NAT
Mode is
enabled, all
remote traffic
over the
VPN
will be
taggedw iththea ssignedIPa ddressu singn
etworka ddresstranslation.
If NAT Mode is not enabled, you can enter a remote peer’s WAN IP address or
hostname(s) here. If the remote uses more than one address, enter only
one of
them here. Multiple hostnames are allowed and can be separated by a space
RemoteIP charactero rc arriager eturn.D ynamic-DNSh ostn amesa rea
lsoa ccepted.
Address/H
ost
Names This field is optional. With this
field
filled, the Pepwave MAX will
initiate connection
(Optional) to each of the remote
IP
addresses until it
succeeds in
making a
connection. If
the
field is empty, the Pepwave MAX will wait for connection from the remote peer.
Therefore, at
least
one
of
the
two
VPN peers must specify this
value. Otherwise,
VPNc onnectionsc annotb ee stablished.
Definep
athc ostforthisp
rofile.
Cost OSPFw illd
eterminetheb estr outethroughthen
etworku
singthea
ssignedc ost.
Default:1
0
This field is used to specify a UDP port number for transporting outgoing VPN
data. Default
If is
selected, UDP port
4500 will
be
used. Port 32015 will
be
used
if
the
remote unit
uses Firmware prior
to
version 5.4
or
if
port 4500
is
unavailable.
If
Customiss elected,e ntera no utgoingp ortn umberfrom1 to6
5535.
DataP
ort
Click the icon to configure data stream using TCP protocol
[EXPERIMENTAL].In the case TCP protocol is used, the exposed TCP session
optionc anb ea
uthorisedtow
orkw
ithT
CPa
cceleratedW ANlink.
Define maximum download and upload speed to each individual peer. This
BandwidthL
imit
functionalityr equiresthep
eertou
seP
epVPNv ersion4
.0.0o
ra bove.
Definep
athc ostforthisp
rofile.
Cost OSPFw
illd
eterminetheb
estr outethroughthen
etworku
singthea
ssignedc ost.
Default:1
0
Select the
degree
to
which
WAN
Smoothing
will
be
implemented
across
your
WAN
WANS
moothingA
links.
UseIPT
oS Checkingthisb
uttone
nablestheu
seo
fIPT
oSh
eaderfield.
Latency
Traffic will be stopped for links that exceed the specified millisecond value with
DifferenceC
utoff respect to
the lowest latency link. (e.g. Lowest latency
is
100ms, a value
of
500ms
meanslinksw
ithlatency6
00mso
rm
orew
illn
otb
eu
sed)
A
- A
dvancedfeature,p
leasec lickthe b
uttono
nthetopr ight-handc ornertoa
ctivate.
To enable Layer 2 Bridging between PepVPN profiles, navigate to Network>LAN>Basic
Settings>*LANP rofileN ame*a ndr efertoinstructionsins ection9
.1
8
.41
WANC
onnectionP
riority
SendA
llT
rafficT
o
This
feature allows
you
to
redirect all
traffic
to
a specified
PepVPN
connection.
Click
the
button
to
selecty ourc onnectiona ndthefollowingm enuw illa
ppear:
You could also specify a DNS server to resolve incoming DNS requests. Click the checkbox next to
Backup Site to designate a backup SpeedFusion profile
that
will
take
over,
should
the
main
PepVPN
connectionfail.
OutboundP
olicy/PepVPNO
utboundC
ustomR
ules
PepVPNL
ocalID
The local
ID
is
a text
string to
identify this
local
unit
when
establishing a VPN connection.
When creating
a
profile
on
a remote unit,
this
local
ID
must
be
entered
in
the
remote Remote
unit's ID
field.
Click
the
ditL
icontoe ocalID.
PepVPNS
ettings
To
designate a custom
handshake port
(TCP),
click custom
the radio
button
and
HandshakeP
ortA
enterthep
ortn
umbery ouw
ishtod
esignate.
Determine the level of backward compatibility needed for PepVPN tunnels.
The
Backward
use
of Latest
the setting is
recommended
as
it
will
improve the
performance and
Compatibility resilienceo fS
peedFusionc onnections.
bandwidthw
illb
ec onsumed.
When Recommended (default) is selected, a health check packet is sent every
fives econds,a
ndthee
xpectedd
etectiontimeis1
5s econds.
When Fast is selected, a health check packet is sent every three seconds, and
thee
xpectedd etectiontimeiss ixs econds.
When Faster is selected, a health check packet is sent every second, and the
expectedd
etectiontimeistwos econds.
When Extreme is selected, a health check
packet
is
sent
every
0.1
second,
and
thee
xpectedd
etectiontimeislessthano nes econd.
A
- A
dvancedfeature,p
leasec lickthe b
uttono
nthetopr ight-handc ornertoa
ctivate.
ImportantN
ote
Peplink proprietary SpeedFusionTM uses TCP port
32015
and UDP
port
4500
for
establishing
VPN connections.
If
you have
a firewall
in
front
of
your
Pepwave devices, you
will
need to
add
firewall
rules
for
these
ports and
protocols
toa
llowinbounda ndo utboundtraffictop
assthroughthefirewall.
Tip
Want to know more about VPN sub-second
session
failover?
Visit
our
YouTube
Channel
for
a video
tutorial!
http://youtu.be/TLQgdpPSY88
15.2 TheP
epwaveR
outerB
ehinda
N
ATR
outer
Pepwave routers support establishing SpeedFusionTM over WAN connections which are
behinda
N
AT( networka
ddresstranslation)r outer.
To enable a WAN connection behind a NAT router to accept VPN connections, you can
configure the NAT router in front of the WAN connection to inbound port-forward TCP port
32015totheP epwaver outer.
If one or more WAN connections on Unit A can accept VPN
connections (by means of
port
forwarding or not), while none of the WAN connections on the peer Unit B can do so, you
should enter all of Unit A’s public IP addresses or hostnames into Unit B’s Remote IP
Addresses / Host Names field. Leave the field in Unit A blank. With this setting, a
SpeedFusionTM connection can be set up and all WAN connections on both sides will be
utilized.
Seethefollowingd
iagramfora
ne
xampleo
fthiss etupinu
se:
One of the WANs connected to Router A is non-NAT’d (2 12.1.1.1). The rest of the WANs
connected to
Router A and
all
WANs connected to Router B are NAT’d. In
this case, thePeer
IP Addresses / Host Names field for Router B should be filled with all of Router A’s
hostnames or public IP addresses (i.e.,
212.1.1.1, 212.2.2.2, and 212.3.3.3), and the
field
in
Router A can be
left
blank.
The two
NAT routers on WAN1 and WAN3 connected to Router A
should inbound port-forward TCP port 32015 to
Router A so
that
all
WANs will
be utilized
in
establishingtheV PN.
15.3 SpeedFusionTM S
tatus
SpeedFusionTM status
is
shown
in
the
Dashboard.
The
connection
status
of
each
connection
profileiss howna
sb elow.
After
clicking Status
the button
at
the
top
right
corner
of
the
SpeedFusionTM table,
you
will
be
forwarded to Status>SpeedFusion , where you can view subnet and WAN connection
TM
informationfore achV PNp leaser efertoS
eer.P ection2 2.6ford
etails.
IPS
ubnetsM
ustB
eU
niqueA
mongV
PNP
eers
16 IPsecVPN
IPsec
VPN
functionality securely connects one or
more branch offices
to
your
company's main
headquarters or to other branches. Data, voice, and video communications between these
locationsa
rek epts afea ndc onfidentiala
crossthep ublicInternet.
IPsec VPN on Pepwave routers is specially designed for multi-WAN environments. For
instance, if a user
sets
up
multiple
IPsec
profiles for
a multi-WAN environment and WAN1
is
connected and healthy, IPsec traffic will go through this link. However, should unforeseen
problems (e.g., unplugged cables or ISP problems) cause WAN1 to go down, our IPsec
implementationw illm
akeu seo
fW
AN2a ndW AN3forfailover.
16.1 IPsecV
PNS
ettings
Many Pepwave products can make multiple IPsec VPN connections with
Peplink, Pepwave,
Cisco, and
Juniper routers. Note
that
all
LAN
subnets
and the
subnets behind them must
be
unique. Otherwise, VPN members will not be able to access each other. All data can be
routed over the VPN with
a selection
of
encryption
standards, such
as
3DES, AES-128, and
AES-256. To configure IPsec VPN on Pepwave devices that support it, navigate to
Advanced>IPsecV PN.
NAT-Traversal
A option and list
of IPsec
defined VPN profiles
will
be
shown. NAT-Traversal
should be enabled if your system is behind a NAT router. Click the New Profile button to
create new IPsec VPN profiles that make VPN connections to remote Pepwave, Cisco, or
Juniper routers via available WAN connections. To edit any of the profiles, click on its
associatedc onnectionn ameintheleftmostc olumn.
IPsecV
PNS
ettings
When this box is checked, this IPsec VPN connection profile will be enabled.
Active
Otherwise,itw illb ed isabled.
ConnectU pon
Check this
box
and
select
a WAN
to
connect
to
this
VPN
automatically
when
the
Disconnection
specifiedW ANisd
isconnected.
of
Remote
GatewayIP Enter the remote peer’s public IP address. For Aggressive Mode, this is
Address/H
ost
optional.
Name
Enter
the
local
LAN
subnets
here.
If
you
have
defined
static
routes,
they
will
be
shownh ere.
Using NAT, you can map a specific local
network / IP
address to
another, and the
packets received by
remote gateway will
appear to
be
coming from
the mapped
network / IP
address. This
allow
you
to
establish IPsec connection
to
a remote
sitethath aso neo rm
ores ubnetso verlappedw ithlocals ite.
Twotypeso
fN
ATp
oliciesc anb
ed
efined:
LocalN
etworks
One-to-One NAT policy: if
the
defined
subnet in
Local
Network and NAT Network
has the same size, for example, policy "192.168.50.0/24 > 172.16.1.0/24" will
translate the local IP
address 192.168.50.10 to
172.16.1.10
and 192.168.50.20
to 172.16.1.20. This is a bidirectional mapping which means clients in remote
sitec aninitiatec onnectiontothelocalc lientsu singthem
appeda ddresstoo.
Many-to-One NAT policy: if
the
defined NAT Network on
the right
hand
side is
an
IP
address (or
having a network prefix
/32),
for
example,
policy
"192.168.1.0/24
> 172.168.50.1/32" will translate all clients in 192.168.1.0/24 network to
172.168.50.1. This is a unidirectional mapping which means clients in remote
sitew illn
otb
ea bletoinitiatec onnectiontothelocalc lients.
Remote
EntertheL
ANa
nds ubnetsthata
relocateda
tther emotes iteh
ere.
Networks
To
access
your
VPN,
clients
will
need
to
authenticate
by
your
choice
of
methods.
Authentication Choose between the Preshared Key and X.509 Certificate methods of
authentication.
Choose Main Mode if both IPsec peers use static IP addresses. Choose
Mode
AggressiveM odeifo
neo ftheIPsecp
eersu
sesd ynamicIPa ddresses.
ForceU
DP
ForforcedU
DPe
ncapsulationr egardlesso
fN
AT-traversal,tickthisc heckbox.
Encapsulation
This defines the peer authentication pre-shared key used to authenticate this
Pre-sharedK
ey VPN
connection.
The
connection
will
be
up
only
if
the
pre-shared
keys
on
each
sidem
atch.
Remote
Available only
when X.509
Certificate is
chosen as
the Authentication
method,
Certificate( pem
thisfielda
llowsy outop
astea
v alidX
.509c ertificate.
encoded)
In Main Mode, this field can be left blank. In Aggressive Mode, if Remote
LocalID Gateway IP
Address is
filled
on
this
end and the peer
end,
this
field
can be
left
blank.O therwise,thisfieldistypicallya U -FQDN.
In Main Mode, this field can be left blank. In Aggressive Mode, if Remote
RemoteID Gateway IP
Address is
filled
on
this
end and the peer
end,
this
field
can be
left
blank.O therwise,thisfieldistypicallya U -FQDN.
Main Mode, this
Phase1 In
( IKE) allows
setting up
to
six
encryption
standards,
in descending
order of
priority,
to
be used
in
initial
connection key
negotiations. Aggressive
In
Proposal Mode,o nlyo nes electionisp ermitted.
This is the Diffie-Hellman group used within IKE. This allows two parties to
establish a shared
secret
over
an
insecure communications channel. The larger
Phase1
D
H
theg
roupn umber,theh igherthes ecurity.
Group Group2
:1
024-bitisthed
efaultv alue.
Group5
:1
536-bitisthea
lternativeo
ption.
Phase1 S
A
This setting specifies the lifetime limit of
this
Phase
1 Security
Association.
By
Lifetime t3
default,itiss eta 600s econds.
Main
Mode, this
Phase2 In
( ESP) allows setting
up to
six
encryption standards, in
descending
order of priority, to be used for the IP data that is being transferred. In
Proposal AggressiveM ode,o nlyo nes electionisp ermitted.
Perfect forward secrecy (PFS) ensures that if a key was compromised, the
attackerw illb
ea
bletoa
ccesso
nlythed
atap
rotectedb ythatk ey.
None
- Do
not
request
for
PFS
when
initiating
connection.
However,
since
there
Phase2
P
FS
is no valid reason to refuse PFS, the system will allow the connection to use
Group PFS i
fr equested b
y t
he r
emote p
eer. T
his i
sthe d
efault v
alue.
Group 2: 1024-bit
Diffie-Hellman
group.
The
larger
the
group
number,
the
higher
thes ecurity.
Group5
:1
536-bitisthethirdo
ption.
Phase2 S
A
This setting specifies the lifetime limit of
this
Phase
2 Security
Association.
By
Lifetime t2
default,itiss eta 8800s econds.
WANC
onnectionP
riority
WANC
onnection Selectthea
ppropriateW
ANc onnectionfromthed
rop-downm
enu.
16.2 GRET
unnel
GenericR outingE ncapsulation( GRE)isa tunnelingp rotocolthatc ane
ncapsulatea w
ide
varietyo
fn
etworklayerp
rotocolsinsidev irtualp oint-to-pointlinkso
vera nInternetP
rotocol
network.A G
REtunneliss imilartoIPSeco rP
epVPN.
Toc onfigurea
G
RET avigatetoA
unnel,n dvanced>
G
RET
unnel.
Click the New Profile button to create new GRE tunnel profiles that establish tunnel
connections to remote tunnel endpoints via available WAN
connections. To
edit
the
profiles,
clicko
nitsa
ssociatedc onnectionn ameintheleftmostc olumn.
GRET
unnelP
rofileS
ettings
Name Thisfieldisfors pecifyinga
n
ametor epresentthisG
RET
unnelc onnectionp
rofile.
When this box is checked, this GRE Tunnel connection profile will be enabled.
Active
Otherwise,itw illb ed isabled.
RemoteG
REIP
Thisfieldisfore
nteringther emoteG
RE’sIPa
ddress
Address
TunnelL
ocalIP
Thisfieldisfors pecifyingthetunnels ourceIPa
ddress.
Address
TunnelR emote
Thisfieldisfors pecifyingthetunneld
estinationIPa
ddress
IPA
ddress
TunnelS
ubnet
Thisfieldistos electthes ubnetm
askthatistob
eu
sedfortheG
REtunnel.
Mask
Remote
InputtheL
ANa
nds ubnetsthata
relocateda
tther emotes iteh
ere.
Networks
17 OutboundPolicy
Pepwave routers can flexibly manage and load balance outbound traffic among WAN
connections.
ImportantN
ote
Outboundp
olicyisa
ppliedo
nlyw
henm
orethano
neW
ANc onnectionisa
ctive.
Thes ettingsform
anaginga ndloadb alancingo
utboundtraffica
relocateda t
Advanced>OutboundP olicyo
rA
dvanced>PepVPN,d ependingo nthem
odel.
17.1 OutboundP
olicy
Outboundp
oliciesform
anaginga
ndloadb
alancingo
utboundtraffica
relocateda
t
Therea
rethreem
ains electionsfortheo
utboundtrafficp
olicy:
● HighA
pplicationC
ompatibility
● NormalA
pplicationC
ompatibility
● Custom
Notethats omeP epwaver outersp nlytheS
rovideo endA
llT
rafficT
os ettingh eeS
ere.S ection1
2.1
etails.
ford
OutboundP
olicyS
ettings
HighA Outbound traffic from a source LAN device is routed through the same WAN
pplication
connection regardless of the destination Internet IP address and protocol. This
Compatibility optionp rovidestheh ighesta pplicationc ompatibility.
Outbound traffic from a source LAN device to the same destination Internet IP
Normal address will
be
routed
through the
same
WAN connection persistently, regardless
Application
of
protocol. This option
provides high compatibility to
most
applications, and
users
Compatibility still benefit from WAN link load b alancing when multiple Internet servers are
accessed.
Outbound traffic behavior can be managed by defining rules in a custom rule
Custom table. A default rule
can
be
defined
for
connections
that
cannot be matched with
anyo fther ules.
Thed olicyisN
efaultp ormalA
pplicationC
ompatibility.
Tip
Wanttok nowm
orea
boutc reatingo
utboundr ules?V
isito
urY
ouTubeC
hannelfora
v ideotutorial!
http://youtu.be/rKH4AS_bQnE
17.2 AddingR
ulesf orO
utboundP
olicy
Them
enuu
nderneathe
nablesy outod
efineO
utboundp
olicyr ules:
The bottom-most rule is Default. Edit this rule to change the device’s default manner of controlling
outbound traffic for all connections that do not match any of the rules above it. Under the Service
heading,c lickD
efaulttoc hangetheses ettings.
Tor earrangethep
riorityo
fo
utboundr ules,d
raga
ndd
ropthemintothed
esireds equence.
By Auto
default, is
selected as Default
the Rule. You can
select Custom to
change
the algorithm
to
be
used.P
leaser efertotheu
pcomings ectionsforthed
etailso
nthea vailablea
lgorithms.
c ustomr ule,c lickA
Toc reatea ddR
ulea
ttheb
ottomo
fthetable.
NewC
ustomR
uleS
ettings
ServiceN
ame Thiss ettings pecifiesthen
ameo
ftheo
utboundtrafficr ule.
This setting specifies whether the outbound traffic rule takes effect. When Enable is
checked, the rule takes effect: traffic is matched and actions are taken by the Pepwave
router based on
the
other parameters of the rule.
When Enable is
unchecked, the rule
does
Enable nottakee ffect:theP epwaver outerd isregardstheo therp arameterso fther ule.
Click the drop-down menu next to the checkbox to
apply
a
time schedule to
this
custom
rule.
This setting specifies the source IP Address, IP Network, MAC Address or Grouped
Networkfortrafficthatm atchesther ule.
Source
This
setting
specifies
the destination
IP
address, IP
network,
Domain
name, SpeedFusion
Destination Cloud,P epVPNP rofileo rG roupedn etworkfortrafficthatm
atchesther ule.
If Domain Name is chosen and a domain name, such as foobar.com, is entered, any
outgoing accesses to foobar.com and *.foobar.com will
match this
criterion. You may
enter
a wildcard (.*) at the end of a domain name to match any host with
a name having the
domain name in the middle. If you enter foobar.*, for example, www.foobar.com,
www.foobar.co.jp, or foobar.co.uk will
also match. Placing wildcards in
any other position is
nots upported.
Note: if
a server has one Internet IP
address and multiple server names, and
if
one
of
the
namesisd efinedh ere,a ccesstoa nyo neo fthes ervern amesw illa
lsom atchthisr ule.
This setting specifies the IP protocol and port of traffic that matches this rule. Via a
drop-downm enu,thefollowingp rotocolsc anb es pecified:
● Any
● TCP
● UDP
Protocola
ndP
ort ● IP
● DSCP
Alternatively, the Protocol Selection Tool
drop-down menu can
be
used
to
automatically
fill
in
the
protocol and
port
number of
common Internet services (e.g.,
HTTP, HTTPS, etc.)
After selecting an item from the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu, the
protocol
andp ortn
umberr emainsm anuallym odifiable.
LoadD
istribution
Thisistod
efinetheo
utboundtrafficw
eightr atiofore
achW
ANc onnection.
Weight
This
field
allows
you to
configure the
default
action
when
all
the
selected
Connections
are
nota
vailable.
Dropt heT raffic- T
rafficw illb
ed
iscarded.
WhenN o
connectionsa re
Use Any Available Connections
- Traffic
will
be
routed
to
any
available
Connection,
even
available itisn
ots electedinthelist.
Fall-through to Next Rule - Traffic will
continue
to
match
the
next
Outbound
Policy
rule
justlikethisr uleisinactive.
17.2.1 Algorithm:WeightedBalance
This setting specifies the ratio of WAN connection usage to be applied on the specified IP
protocola ndp ort.T
hiss ettingisa pplicableo henA
nlyw lgorithmiss ettoW eightedB alance.
● USB:
10
Totalw
eightis6
0=
( 10+
10+
1
0+
1
0+
1
0+
1
0).
Matchingtrafficd
istributedtoE
thernetW
AN1is1
6.7%=
( 10/6
0x 1
00%.
Matchingtrafficd
istributedtoE
thernetW
AN2is1
6.7%=
( 10/6
0)x 1
00%.
Matchingtrafficd
istributedtoW
i-FiW
ANis1
6.7%=
( 10/6
0)x 1
00%.
Matchingtrafficd
istributedtoC
ellular1
is1
6.7%=
( 10/6
0)x 1
00%.
Matchingtrafficd
istributedtoC
ellular2
is1
6.7%=
( 10/6
0)x 1
00%.
Matchingtrafficd
istributedtoU
SBis1
6.7%=
( 10/6
0)x 1
00%.
17.2.2 Algorithm:Persistence
The configuration of persistent services is the solution to the few situations where link
load
distribution for Internet services is undesirable. For example, for security reasons, many
e-banking and other secure websites terminate the session when the client computer’s
InternetIPa
ddressc hangesm id-session.
In
general, different
Internet IP addresses represent different computers. The
security concern
is
that
an
IP address change during
a session may
be
the
result
of
an
unauthorized intrusion
attempt. Therefore, to prevent damages from
the
potential
intrusion, the
session
is
terminated
uponthed etectiono fa nIPa
ddressc hange.
Pepwave routers can
be configured to
distribute
data traffic
across multiple WAN connections.
Also, the Internet IP depends on the WAN connections over which communication actually
takes place. As a result, a LAN
client computer behind the
Pepwave router may communicate
using multiple Internet IP addresses. For
example,
a LAN client
computer behind a Pepwave
router with three WAN connections may communicate on
the
Internet
using three
different
IP
addresses.
With the persistence feature, rules can be configured to enable client computers to
persistently utilize
the
same
WAN connections
for
e-banking and
other
secure
websites. As
a
result, a client computer will communicate using one IP address, eliminating the issues
mentioneda bove.
Therea
retwop odes:B
ersistentm yS
ourcea
ndB
yD
estination.
ByS
ource: The same WAN connection will be used for traffic matching the rule and
originating from the same machine, regardless of its
destination. This option
willp
rovidetheh
ighestlevelo fa
pplicationc ompatibility.
ByD
estination: The same WAN connection will be used for traffic matching the rule,
originating from the same machine, and going to the
same
destination. This
option can better distribute
loads
to
WAN connections when
there
are
only
a
fewc lientm
achines.
The default mode is By Source. When there are multiple client requests, they can be
distributed (persistently) to WAN connections with a weight. If you choose Auto in Load
Distribution, the weights will be automatically adjusted according to each WAN’s
Downstream Bandwidth which is specified in the WAN settings page). If you choose
Custom,y ouc anc ustomizethew eighto fe
achW ANm anuallyb yu singthes liders.
17.2.3 Algorithm:Enforced
This setting specifies the WAN connection usage to be applied on the
specified
IP
protocol
andp ort.T hiss ettingisa pplicableo henA
nlyw lgorithmiss ettoE nforced.
Matching traffic
will
be routed through
the
specified
WAN connection, regardless of
the health
check status of the WAN connection. Starting from Firmware 5.2, outbound traffic can be
enforcedtog othrougha s pecifiedS
peedFusionTM c onnection.
17.2.4 Algorithm:P
riority
This
setting
specifies the
priority
of the
WAN connections
used to
route the specified network
service. The highest priority WAN connection available will always be used for routing the
specified type of traffic. A lower priority WAN connection will be used only when all higher
priorityc onnectionsh aveb ecomeu navailable.
Starting from Firmware 5.2, outbound traffic can be prioritized
to
go
through SpeedFusionTM
connection(s).B yd
efault,V
PNc onnectionsa ren otincludedinthep rioritylist.
Tip
Configurem
ultipled
istributionr ulestoa
ccommodated
ifferentk indso
fs ervices.
17.2.5 Algorithm:O
verflow
The traffic
matching this
rule will
be
routed
through the
healthy WAN connection
that
has
the
highest priority
and
is not
in
full
load. When
this
connection gets saturated, new
sessions will
ber outedtothen exth ealthyW ANc onnectionthatisn otinfullload.
Drag
and
drop
to
specify
the
order
of
WAN connections to
be used
for
routing
traffic.
Only
the
highestp
riorityh
ealthyc onnectionthatisn
otinfullloadw
illb
eu
sed.
17.2.6 Algorithm:L
eastU
sed
The traffic matching this rule will be routed through the healthy WAN connection that is
selected in Connection and has the most available download bandwidth. The available
download bandwidth of a WAN connection is calculated from the total download bandwidth
specified on the
WAN settings page and the
current download usage. The
available
bandwidth
andW ANs electionisd eterminede verytimea nIPs essionism ade.
17.2.7 Algorithm:LowestLatency
The traffic matching this rule will be routed through the healthy WAN connection that is
selected in Connection and has the lowest latency. Latency checking packets are issued
periodically to a nearby router of each WAN connection to determine its latency value. The
latency of a WAN is the packet round trip time of the WAN connection. Additional network
usagem ayb eincurreda sa r esult.
Tip
17.2.8 ExpertMode
Expert Mode is available on some Pepwave routers for use by
advanced users.
To enable
the
feature,
click
on
the
help
icon
and click
turno
nE
xpertM ode.
In Expert Mode, a new special rule, SpeedFusionTM Routes, is
displayed in the Custom Rules table. This rule represents all
SpeedFusionTM routes learned from remote VPN peers.
By default,
this
bar is
on
the
top
of
all
custom rules. This position
means that
traffic
for
remote VPN subnets will be
routed to the
corresponding VPN peer. You
canc reatec ustomP riorityo rE
nforcedr ulesa ndm ovethem
abovetheb
artoo
verridetheS
peedFusionTMroutes.
Upond
isablingE
xpertM
ode,a
llr ulesa
bovetheb
arw
illb
er emoved.
18 PortForwarding
Pepwave routers can act as a firewall that blocks, by default, all inbound access from the
Internet. By using port forwarding, Internet users can access servers behind the Pepwave
router.Inboundp ortforwardingr ulesc anb ed
efineda tA dvanced>PortF orwarding.
Tod
efinea ews ervice,c lickA
n ddS
ervice.
PortF
orwardingS
ettings
This setting specifies whether the inbound service takes effect. When Enable is
checked, the
inbound service takes
effect:
traffic
is
matched and
actions
are
taken by
Enable the Pepwave router based on the other parameters of
the
rule.
When
this
setting
is
disabled, the
inbound service does
not take effect:
the
Pepwave router
disregards the
otherp arameterso fther ule.
This setting identifies the service to the system administrator. Valid values for this
ServiceN
ame
settingc onsisto fo
nlya
lphanumerica ndu nderscore“ _”c haracters.
The IP Protocol setting, along with the Port setting, specifies the protocol of the
service as TCP, UDP, ICMP, or
IP.
Traffic that is received by the
Pepwave router via
the
specified protocol at
the specified port(s) is forwarded to the
LAN hosts specified
by the Servers setting. Please see below for details on the Port and Servers
IPP
rotocol
settings. Alternatively, the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu can
be used to
automatically fill
in
the protocol and a single port number of
common Internet services
(e.g. HTTP, HTTPS, etc.). After selecting an
item from the Protocol Selection Tool
drop-downm enu,thep rotocola ndp ortn umberr emainm anuallym odifiable.
The Port setting specifies the port(s) that correspond to the service, and can be
configuredtob ehaveino neo fthefollowingm anners:
AnyP
ort,S
ingleP
ort,P
ortR
ange,P
ortM
ap,andR
angeM
apping
Any
Port: all
traffic
that is
received by the Pepwave router via the
specified protocol is
forwarded to the servers specified by the Servers setting. For example, with IP
Protocol set to TCP, and Port set to Any Port, all TCP traffic is forwarded
to
the
configureds ervers.
Single Port: traffic
that is
received by the Pepwave router via the
specified protocol at
the specified port is forwarded via the same port to the servers specified by the
Servers setting. For example, IP
with Protocol
set TCP,
to Port
and set Single
to
Port and Service Port 80, TCP traffic received on port 80 is forwarded to the
configureds erversv iap ort8 0.
Port Range: traffic that
is received by
the
Pepwave router via
the
specified protocol at
Port the
specified port
range is
forwarded via
the
same respective ports to
the
LAN hosts
specified by Servers
the setting.
For
example, with IP
Protocol set toTCP
Port
, and
set Port
to Range Service
and Ports 80-88, TCP traffic received on
ports 80 through
88isforwardedtothec onfigureds erversv iather espectivep orts.
Port Mapping: traffic that
is
received by Pepwave router via
the
specified protocol at
the specified port is forwarded via a different port to the servers specified by the
Serverss etting.
For example, with IP Protocol set to TCP, Port
and set Port
to Mapping, Service
Port 80, and Map to Port 88, TCP traffic
on
port
80
is
forwarded to
the
configured
serversv iap ort8
8.
(Pleases eeb
elowford ntheS
etailso erverss etting.)
Range Mapping: traffic that is received by the Pepwave router via the specified
protocol at the specified port range is forwarded via a different port to the servers
specifiedb ytheS erverss etting.
InboundIP
This setting specifies the WAN connections and Internet IP
address(es)
from
which
Address(es) thes ervicec anb
ea
ccessed.
ServerIP
This setting
specifies
the
LAN
IP
address
of
the
server
that
handles
the
requests
for
Address thes ervice.
18.1 UPnP/ N
AT-PMPS
ettings
UPnP and
NAT-PMP are
network protocols which
allow a computer
connected to
the LAN port
to
automatically
configure the
router
to
allow
parties
on
the WAN
port
to
connect
to
itself. That
way,thep rocesso finboundp ortforwardingb ecomesa utomated.
When a computer creates a rule using these protocols, the specified TCP/UDP port of all
WANc onnections'd efaultIPa ddressw illb
eforwarded.
Check the corresponding box(es) to enable UPnP and/or NAT-PMP. Enable these features
onlyify outrustthec omputersc onnectedtotheL ANp
orts.
When the
options are
enabled,
a table
listing
all
the
forwarded
ports
under
these
two
protocols
canb tS
efounda tatus> U
PnP/N
AT-PMP.
19 NATMappings
NAT mappings allow IP address mapping of all inbound and outbound NAT’d traffic to and
from an internal client IP address. Settings to configure NAT mappings are located at
Advanced> N
ATM appings.
Toa
dda
r uleforN appings,c lickA
ATm ddN
ATR
ule.
NATM
appingS
ettings
This refers
to
the
LAN host’s private
IP
address. The
system maps this
address
to a number of public IP addresses (specified below) in order to facilitate
Address
inbound and outbound traffic. This
option is
only
available IP
when Address is
selected.
The IP range is a contiguous group of private IP addresses used
by
the
LAN
host. The system maps these addresses to a number of public IP addresses
Range
(specified below) to facilitate
outbound traffic.
This option
is
only
available
when
IPR
angeiss elected.
henIPN
availablew etworkiss elected.
This setting specifies the WAN IP addresses that should be used when an
IP
connection is made from a LAN host to the Internet. Each LAN host in
an
IP
range or IP network will be evenly mapped to one
of
each
selected WAN's IP
addresses (for better IP address utilization) in a persistent manner (for better
Outbound
applicationc ompatibility).
Mappings
Note that if
you
do
not
want to
use a specific
WAN for
outgoing accesses, you
should still
choose default here, then customize the
outbound access rule
in
the
Outbound Policy section. Also note that
WAN connections in
drop-in
mode or
IPforwardingm odea ren ots hownh ere.
ClickS
avetos avethes ettingsw
henc onfigurationh
asb
eenc ompleted.
ImportantN
ote
verridetheInboundM
Inboundfirewallr uleso appingss ettings.
20 QoS
20.1 UserG
roups
LAN and PPTP clients can be categorized into three user groups: Manager, Staff, and
Guest. This menu allows you to
define
rules
and
assign client
IP
addresses or
subnets
to
a
user group. You can apply different bandwidth and traffic
prioritization
policies
on
each
user
group in the Bandwidth Control and Application sections (note that the options available
herev aryb ym
odel).
The table is
automatically sorted by
rule precedence. The smaller
and
more specific
subnets
are put towards the top of the table and have higher precedence; larger and less specific
subnetsa rep lacedtowardstheb ottom.
Click the Add button to define clients and their
user
group. Click the button to
remove
the
defined rule.
Two default
rules are
pre-defined and
put
at
the
bottom. They are All DHCP
reservation clients and Everyone, and they cannot be removed. The All
DHCP reservation
client represents the
LAN
clients defined in
the DHCP Reservation table on the
LAN settings
page. Everyone represents all
clients that are not
defined in
any rule
above. Click on a rule
to
changeitsg roup.
Add/E
ditU
serG
roup
From the drop-down menu, choose whether you are going to define the
client(s) by an IP Address or a Subnet. If IP Address is selected, enter a
Subnet/IP
name defined in DHCP reservation table or a LAN client's IP
Address address. If Subnet is selected, enter a subnet address and
specify
its
subnet
mask.
This field is to define which User Group the specified subnet / IP address
Group
belongsto.
Once
users have
been
assigned to
a user
group, their
internet
traffic
will
be
restricted by
rules
definedforthatp articularg
roup.P
leaser efertothefollowingtwos ectionsford etails.
20.2 BandwidthC
ontrol
You can define a maximum download speed (over all WAN connections)
and upload
speed
(for each WAN connection) that each individual Staff and Guest member can consume.
No
limit can be imposed on individual Manager members. By default, download and upload
bandwidthlimitsa res ettou s0
nlimited( seta ) .
20.3 Application
20.3.1 ApplicationPrioritization
On many Pepwave routers,
you
can
choose whether to
apply
the
same
prioritization
settings
toa
llu
serg
roupso
rc ustomizethes ettingsfore
achg
roup.
Three application priority
levels can be set: igh,━
↑H Normal, and↓L ow. Pepwave routers
can
detect various application traffic
types by
inspecting the
packet content.
Select
an
application
by
choosing a supported application, or by defining a custom application
manually. The priority
preference of
supported applications is
placed at
the top
of
the
table. Custom applications are
attheb
ottom.
20.3.3 DSL/CableOptimization
DSL/cable-based WAN connections have lower upload bandwidth and higher
download bandwidth. When a DSL/cable circuit's
uplink is
congested, the download bandwidth
will
be
affected.
Users will
not be
able
to
download data at
full
speed until
the uplink becomes
less congested. DSL/Cable Optimization can relieve such an
issue.
When it
is
enabled, the
download speed will become less affected by the upload traffic. By default, this feature is
enabled.
21 Firewall
A firewall is a mechanism that selectively filters data traffic between the WAN side (the
Internet) and the LAN side of the network. It can protect the local network from potential
hackera ttacks,a ccesstoo
ffensivew ebsites,a nd/oro therinappropriateu ses.
The firewall functionality of Pepwave routers supports the selective filtering of
data
traffic
in
bothd irections:
● Outbound( LANtoW
AN)
● Inbound( WANtoL
AN)
● InternalN
etwork( VLANtoV
LAN)
Thefirewalla
lsos upportsthefollowingfunctionality:
● Intrusiond
etectiona
ndD
oSp
revention
● Webb
locking
WithS
peedFusionTM e
nabled,thefirewallr ulesa
lsoa
pplytoV
PNtunneledtraffic.
21.1 Outbounda
ndI nboundF
irewallR
ules
21.1.1 AccessRules
The
outbound
firewall
settings
are
located Advanced>Firewall>Access
at Rules>Outbound
FirewallR ules.
ClickA
ddR
uletod
isplaythefollowings creen:
Inbound firewall settings are located at Advanced>Firewall>Access Rules>Inbound
FirewallR
ules.
ClickA
ddR
uletod
isplaythefollowings creen:
Internal
Network
firewall
settings
are
located Advanced>Firewall>Access
at Rules>Internal
NetworkF irewallR ules.
ClickA
ddR
uletod
isplaythefollowingw
indow:
Inbound/O
utbound/InternalN
etworkF
irewallS
ettings
RuleN
ame Thiss ettings pecifiesa
n
ameforthefirewallr ule.
This setting specifies whether the firewall rule should take effect. If the box is
checked, the firewall rule takes effect. If the traffic matches the specified
protocol/IP/port, actions will be
taken by
the
Pepwave router
based on
the
other
parameters of the rule. If the box
is
not
checked, the
firewall
rule does not
take
Enable effect.T heP
epwaver outerw illd
isregardtheo therp
arameterso fther ule.
Click
the
dropdown
menu
next
to
the
checkbox
to
place
this
firewall
rule
on
a
time
schedule.
WANC
onnection
SelecttheW
ANc onnectionthatthisfirewallr ules houlda
pplyto.
(Inbound)
This setting specifies the protocol to be matched. Via a drop-down menu, the
followingp rotocolsc anb es pecified:
● Any
● TCP
● UDP
● ICMP
Protocol ● DSCP
● IP
Alternatively, the Protocol Selection Tool drop-down menu can be used to
automatically fill in the protocol and port number of common Internet services
(e.g.,H
TTP,H TTPS,e tc.)
After selecting an item from the Protocol Selection Tool
drop-down
menu,
the
protocola ndp
ortn umberr emainsm anuallym odifiable.
This specifies the source IP address(es) and port number(s) to be
matched for
the
firewall rule.
A single
address, or
a network,
can
be
specified
as Source
the
IP&
P orts etting,a sindicatedb ythefollowings creenshot:
SourceIP&
P
ort
In
addition,
a single
port,
or
a range
of
ports,
can
be
specified
for Source
the IP
&
Ports ettings.
Action This
setting
specifies
the
action
to
be
taken
by
the
router
upon
encountering
traffic
thatm
atchestheb
otho
fthefollowing:
● SourceIP&
p
ort
● DestinationIP&
p
ort
With the
value Allow
of for Action
the setting, the
matching traffic
passes through
the
router (to
be
routed
to
the
destination). If
the
value
of Action
the setting
is
set
toD
eny,them atchingtrafficd oesn otp
assthroughther outer( andisd
iscarded).
Tor emovea
r ule,c lickthe b
utton.
Rules are matched from top to bottom. If a connection matches any
one of
the
upper
rules,
the
matching process will
stop. If
none
of
the rules
match, Default
the rule
will
be
applied.
By
default,theD efaultr uleiss eta sA llowforO utbound,Inbounda ndInternalN etworka ccess.
Tip
If
the
default
inbound rule
is
set Allow
to for
NAT-enabled WANs, no
inbound Allow
firewall
rules will
be required for inbound port forwarding and inbound NAT mapping rules. However, if the default
inboundr uleiss eta sD
eny,a c orrespondingA llowfirewallr ulew
illb
er equired.
21.1.2 ApplyFirewallRulestoPepVpnT
raffic
To
When this option is enabled, Outbound Firewall Rules will be applied to PepVPN traffic.
turno
nthisfeature,c lick ,c hecktheE
nablec heckb ndp
ox,a resstheS
aveb
utton.
21.1.3 IntrusionD
etectionandDoSPrevention
Pepwave routers can detect and
prevent
intrusions
and
denial-of-service
(DoS)
attacks
from
the Internet. To turn
on
this
feature,
click
,
check Enable
the check and
box, press
the
Saveb utton.
When this
feature
is
enabled,
the
Pepwave router
will
detect
and
prevent
the
following
kinds
of
intrusionsa ndd
enial-of-servicea
ttacks.
● Ports can
o NMAPF
IN/URG/PSH
o Xmastree
o AnotherX
mastree
o Nulls can
o SYN/RST
o SYN/FIN
● SYNfloodp
revention
● Pingflooda
ttackp
revention
21.2 ContentB
locking
21.2.1 ApplicationB
locking
Choose applications to be blocked
from LAN/PPTP/PepVPN peer
clients'
access,
except
for
thoseo
ntheE
xemptedU serG roupso rE
xemptedS
ubnetsd
efinedb elow.
21.2.2 WebB
locking
Defines website domain names to be
blocked
from
LAN/PPTP/PepVPN peer
clients'
access
exceptforthoseo ntheE
xemptedU serG roupso
rE
xemptedS
ubnetsd
efinedb
elow.
If
"foobar.com"
is
entered,
any
web
site
with
a host
name
ending
in foobar.com will
be
blocked,
e.g.w ww.foobar.com,foobar.com,e
tc.H
owever," myfoobar.com"w illn
otb
eb
locked.
You
may enter the
wild
card ".*"
at
the
end
of
a domain name to
block
any
web
site with a host
name having the domain name in
the
middle. If
you
enter
"foobar.*",
then
"www.foobar.com",
"www.foobar.co.jp", or "foobar.co.uk" will be blocked. Placing the wild card in any other
positionisn ots upported.
Thed
evicew
illinspecta
ndlookforb
lockedd
omainn
ameso
na
llH
TTPa
ndH
TTPStraffic.
21.2.3 CustomizedD
omains
Enter an appropriate website address, and the Pepwave MAX will block and disallow
LAN/PPTP/SpeedFusionTM peer
clients
to
access
these websites.
Exceptions
can
be added
usingtheinstructionsinS ections2 0.1.3.2a nd2 0.1.3.3.
You may
enter
the
wild
card ".*"
at
the
end of
a domain name to
block any web site with
a host
name having the domain name in the middle. For example, If you enter "foobar.*," then
"www.foobar.com," "www.foobar.co.jp," or
"foobar.co.uk" will
be
blocked. Placing the
wild
card
ina
nyo
therp
ositionisn
ots upported.
The
Pepwave MAX will
inspect and
look for
blocked
domain
names
on
all
HTTP
traffic.
Secure
web( HTTPS)trafficisn
ots upported.
21.2.4 ExemptedU
serG
roups
Check and select pre-defined
user
group(s)
who
can
be
exempted
from
the
access
blocking
rules.
User groups can be
defined QoS>User
at Groups section.
Please refer Section
to 17.1
ford
etails.
21.2.5 ExemptedSubnets
With
the
subnet
defined in
the
field,
clients
on
the
particular
subnet(s)
can
be
exempted
from
thea
ccessb lockingr ules.
21.2.6 URLLogging
Click enable, and
the
enter
the
ip
address
and
port
(if
applicable)
where
your
remote
syslog
serverislocated.
22 RoutingP
rotocols
22.1 OSPF&
R
IPv2
TheP epwaves upportsO SPFa ndR
IPv2d ynamicr outingp rotocols.
Click the Advanced tab from the top bar, and then
click Routing
the Protocols
> OSPF
&
RIPv2itemo nthes idebartor eachthefollowingm enu:
OSPF
Thisfieldd
eterminestheIDo fther outer.B
yd
efault,thisiss pecifieda
stheW
AN
RouterID IPa
ddress.Ify ouw
anttos pecifyy ouro wnID,e nteritintotheC
ustomfield.
Thisisa
no
verviewo ftheO
SPFa reasthaty ouh
aved
efined.C lickingo nthe
Area nameu nderA reaa
llowsy outoc onfigurethec onnection.T od
efinea n
ewa rea,
clickA
dd.T
od
eletea
ne
xistinga
rea,c licko
nthe .
OSPFS
ettings
Assign a name
to
be
applied
to
this
group.
Machines linked
to
this group will
send
AreaID andr eceiver elatedO SPFp ackets,w hileu
nlinkedm
achinesw illignorethem.
LinkT
ype Choosethetypeo
fn
etworkthatthisa
reaw
illu
se.
If an authentication method is used, select one from this drop-down menu.
Authentication Available options are MD5 and Text. Authentication key(s)
may
be
input
next
to
thed
rop-downm
enua
fters electinga
na
uthenticationm
ethod.
Interfaces Selecttheinterface(s)thatthisa
reaw
illu
setolistentoa
ndd
eliverO
SPFp
ackets.
Toa
ccessR
IPv2s ettings,c licko
n .
RIPv2S
ettings
If an authentication method is used, select one from this drop-down menu.
Authentication Available options are MD5 and Text. Authentication key(s)
may
be
input
next
to
thed
rop-downm
enua
fters electinga
na
uthenticationm
ethod.
Interfaces Selecttheinterface(s)thatthisa
reaw
illu
setolistentoa
ndd
eliverR
IPv2p
ackets.
OSPF&
R
IPv2R
outeA
dvertisement
PepVPNR oute Isolate PepVPN peers from each other. Received PepVPN routes will not be
Isolation forwardedtoo therP
epVPNp eerstor educeb andwidthc onsumption..
Network Networks
to
be
advertised over
OSPF &
RIPv2.
If
no
network
is
selected,
all
LAN
/
Advertising VLANn
etworksw illb
ea
dvertisedb yd
efault.
StaticR
oute
EnablingO
SPF& R
IPv2R outeA dvertisinga llowsittoa
dvertiseL
ANs taticr outes
Advertising overO
SPF& R IPv2.S taticr outeso
ntheE
xcludedN etworkstablew illn
otb
e
advertised.
22.2 BGP
ClicktheN
etworktaba
longthetopb ndthenc licktheB
ar,a GPitemo
nthes idebarto
configureB GP.
Clickthe" x
" tod
eletea
B
GPp
rofile.
Click" A
dd"toc reatea
n
ewB
GPp
rofile.
BGP
Name Thisfields pecifiesthen
amethatr epresentsthisp
rofile.
Interface Theinterfaceinw
hichtheB
GPn
eighborislocated.
Autonomous
TheA
utonomousS
ystemN
umber( ASN)a
ssignedtothisp
rofile.
System
Neighbor BGPN
eighborsa
ndtheird
etails.
IPa
ddress TheIPa
ddresso
ftheN
eighbor.
A
utonomous
TheN
eighbor'sA
SN.
System
Thisfieldd eterminestheT ime-to-live( TTL)o fB
GPp ackets.
Leave this
field
blank if
the BGP
neighbor is
directly connected, otherwise
you
must
Multihop/TTL specify a TTL value. This option should be used if the configured Neighbor’s IP
address does not match the selected Interface’s network subnets.
The
TTL
value
mustb eb etween2 to2
55.
Password (Optional)A
ssigna
p
asswordforM
D5a
uthenticationo
fB
GPs essions.
ASp
athtob
ep
rependedtother outesr eceivedfromthisN
eighbor.
AS-Path
Valuesm ustb
eA SNa nds eparatedb
yc ommas.
Prepending: For example: inputting "64530,64531" will prepend "64530, 64531" to received
routes.
Wait
time
in
seconds
for
a keepalive
message
from
a Neighbor
before
considering
theB
GPc onnectiona ss talled.
HoldT
ime Thev aluem
ustb
ee
ither0
( infiniteh
oldtime)o
rb
etween3
a
nd6
5535inclusively.
Default:2
40
Enable this option to advertise your own source address as the next hop when
NextH
opS
elf propagatingr outes.
This is the metric advertised to iBGP Neighbors to indicate the preference for
iBGPL
ocal
externalr outes.T hev aluem ustb eb etween0 to4
294967295inclusively.
Preference
Default:1
00
Enable this option to add Bidirectional Forwarding Detection for path failure. All
directly
connected Neighbors that
use
the
same
physical interface share the
same
BFD BFD settings. All mulithop Neighbors share the same multihop BFD settings. You
can configure BFD settings in the BGP profile listing page after this option is
enabled.
Network
SelecttheN
etworksthatw
illb
ea
dvertisedtotheB
GPN
eighbor.
Advertising
StaticR
oute
Enable this option to advertise static LAN routes. Static routes that match the
Advertising ExcludedN etworkstablew illn
otb
ea
dvertised.
CustomR oute
Additionalr outestob
ea
dvertisedtotheB
GPN
eighbor.
Advertising
AdvertiseO
SPF
Whenthisb
oxisc hecked,e
verylearntO
SPFr outew
illb
ea
dvertised.
Route
Assigna
p
refixtoa
C
ommunity.
SetC
ommunity
Community:
Twon
umbersinn
ew-format.
e.g.6
5000:21344
Well-knownc ommunities:
no-export6
5535:65281
no-advertise6
5535:65282
no-export-subconfed6
5535:65283
no-peer6
5535:65284
RouteP
refix:
Commas eparatedn
etworks.
e.g.1
72.168.1.0/24,192.168.1.0/28
Thisfielda
llowsforthes electiono
fthefilterm
odeforr outeimport.
None:A
llB
GPr outesw
illb
ea
ccepted.
Accept: Routes in
"Restricted
Networks"
will
be
accepted,
routes
not
in
the
list
will
FilterM
ode
ber ejected.
Reject: Routes
in
"Restricted
Networks"
will
be
rejected,
routes
not
in
the
list
will
be
accepted.
Thisfields pecifiesthen
etwork(s)inthe“ routeimport”e
ntry.
Restricted
Exact Match: When this box is checked, only routes with the
same
Network
and
Networks SubnetM askw
illb
efiltered.
Otherwise,r outesw ithintheN etworksa ndS
ubnetsw illb
efiltered.
Thisfielda
llowsforthes electiono
fthefilterm
odeforr outee
xport.
FilterM
ode None:A
llB
GPr outesw
illb
ea
ccepted.
Accept: Routes
in
"Restricted
Networks"
will
be
accepted,
routes
not
in
the
list
will
ber ejected.
Reject: Routes
in
"Restricted
Networks"
will
be
rejected,
routes
not
in
the
list
will
be
accepted.
Thisfields pecifiesthen
etwork(s)inthe“ routee
xport”e
ntry.
Restricted
Exact Match: When this box is checked, only routes with the
same
Network
and
Networks SubnetM askw
illb
efiltered.
Otherwise,r outesw ithintheN etworksa ndS
ubnetsw illb
efiltered.
Exportt oo
ther
When this box is checked, routes learnt from this BGP profile will
be
exported
to
BGPP rofile otherB
GPp rofiles.
When
this
box
is
checked,
routes
learnt
from
this
BGP
profile
will
be
exported
to
the
Exportt oO
SPF OSPFr outingp
rotocol.
23 RemoteUserAccess
A remote-access VPN connection allows an individual user
to
connect to
a private
business
network from
a remote location
using a laptop
or
desktop computer connected to
the
Internet.
Networks routed by a Pepwave router can be remotely accessed via OpenVPN, L2TP with
IPsec or PPTP. To configure this feature, navigate Network
to > Remote User Access and
choosether equiredV PNtype.
23.1 L2TPw
ithI Psec
L2TPw
ithIPsecR
emoteU
serA
ccessS
ettings
Enter your pre shared key in the text field. Please
note
that
remote
devices
will
Pre-sharedK
ey
needthisp resharedk eytoa ccesstheB alance.
ListenO
n Thiss ettingisfors pecifyingtheW
ANIPa
ddressesthata
llowr emoteu
sera
ccess.
DisableW
eak Clickthe b
uttontos howa
nde nablethiso
ption.
Ciphers Whenc hecked,w eakc ipherss ucha s3
DESw illb
ed
isabled.
Continuetoc onfigurethea
uthenticationm
ethod.
23.2 OpenVPN
SelectO
penVPNa
ndc ontinuetoc onfigurethea
uthenticationm
ethod.
The OpenVPN Client profile can be downloaded from the Status > device page after the
configurationh
asb
eens aved.
Youh
avea
c hoiceb
etween2
d
ifferentO
penVPNC
lientp
rofiles:
● "routea llt raffic"p rofile
Usingthisp rofile,V
PNc lientsw ills enda
llthetrafficthroughtheO penVPNtunnel
● "splitt unnel"p rofile
Using
this profile,
VPN clients
will
ONLY send those traffic
designated
to
the
untagged
LANa ndV LANs egmentthroughtheO penVPNtunnel.
23.3 PPTP
Noa
dditionalc onfigurationr equired.
The Point-to-Point
Tunneling
Protocol
(PPTP) is
an
obsolete
method
for
implementing
virtual
privaten etworks.P
PTPh asm
anyw ellk nowns ecurityissues
Continuetoc onfigurea
uthenticationm
ethod.
23.4 AuthenticationM
ethods
AuthenticationM
ethod
Connectt o
SelecttheV
LANn
etworkforr emoteu
serstoe
nabler emoteu
sera
ccesso
n.
Network
Authentication Determinethem
ethodo
fa
uthenticatingr emoteu
sers
Usera
ccounts:
Thiss ettinga llowsy outod efinetheR
emoteU serA ccounts.
Click Add to input username and password to create an account. After adding the user
accounts,y ouc anc licko na u
sernametoe
ditthea
ccountp assword.
Note:
Theu
sernamem ustc ontainlowercaseletters,n umerics,u nderscore(_),d
ash(-),a
ts ign(@),
andp
eriod(.)o
nly.
Thep
asswordm ustb eb
etween8
a
nd1
2c haracterslong.
LDAPS
erver:
Enterthem
atchingL
DAPs erverd
etailstoa
llowforL
DAPs ervera
uthentication.
RadiusS
erver:
Enterthem
atchingR
adius s erverd
etailstoa
llowforR
adiuss ervera
uthentication.
ActiveD
irectory:
Enterthem
atchingA
ctiveD
irectoryd
etailstoa
llowforA
ctiveD
irectorys ervera
uthentication.
24 MiscellaneousSettings
The miscellaneous settings include configuration for High Availability, Certificate Manager,
service forwarding, service passthrough, GPS forwarding, GPIO, Groupe Networks and
SIM
Toolkit( dependingthefeatureiss upportedo nthem
odelo fP
eplinr outerthatisb
eingu sed).
24.1 HighA
vailability
Many Pepwave routers support high availability (HA) configurations via an open standard
virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP, RFC 3768).
In
an
HA
configuration, two
Pepwave
routers provide redundancy and failover
in
a master-slave arrangement. In
the
event that
the
master unit is down, the slave unit becomes active. High availability will be disabled
automaticallyw herethereisa d
rop-inc onnectionc onfiguredo na
L
ANb ypassp ort.
In the diagram, the WAN ports of each Pepwave router connect to the router and to the
modem.B othP
epwaver outersc onnecttothes ameL ANs witchv iaa
L ANp ort.
An
elaboration
on
the
technical
details
of
the
implementation
of
the
virtual
router
redundancy
protocol( VRRP,R FC3 768)b
yP
epwaver outersfollows:
● In an HA
configuration, the
two
Pepwave
routers
communicate
with
each
other
using
VRRPo vertheL
AN.
● The two Pepwave routers broadcast heartbeat signals to the LAN at a frequency
of
oneh eartbeats ignalp ers econd.
● In
the
event that
no
heartbeat
signal
from
the
master
Pepwave
router
is
received
in
3
seconds (or
longer) since
the
last heartbeat signal,
the
slave
Pepwave router becomes
active.
● The slave Pepwave router initiates the WAN connections and binds to a previously
configuredL
ANIPa
ddress.
● At a subsequent point when the master Pepwave router recovers, it will once
again
becomea ctive.
Youc anc onfigureh
igha tA
vailabilitya dvanced>Misc.S
ettings>HighA
vailability.
InterfaceforM
asterR
outer InterfaceforS
laveR
outer
HighA
vailability
Checking this box specifies that the Pepwave router is part of a high availability
Enable
configuration.
This number identifies a pair of Pepwave routers operating in a high availability
GroupN
umber configuration. The two Pepwave routers in the pair must have the same Group
Numberv alue.
This setting specifies whether the Pepwave router operates in master or slave
mode. Click the corresponding radio button to set the role of
the
unit.
One of
the
PreferredR
ole
units in the pair must be configured as the master, and the other unit must be
configureda sthes lave.
ResumeM aster
This option is displayed when Master mode is selected Preferred
in Role. If
this
RoleU
pon
option is enabled, once the
device
has recovered from
an outage, it
will
take over
Recovery andr esumeitsM asterr olefromthes laveu nit.
This option is displayed when Slave mode is selected in Preferred Role. If this
the Master
option is enabled and Serial
Number entered matches with
the
actual
Configuration
master unit's, the master unit
will
automatically transfer the configuration to
this unit.
Sync. Please make sure the LAN IP Address and the Subnet Mask fields are set
correctly in the LAN settings page. You can refer to the Event Log for the
configurations ynchronizations tatus.
MasterS
erial
If
Configuration Sync. is
checked, the
serial
number
of
the
master
unit
is
required
Number hereforthefeaturetow
orkp roperly.
VirtualIP The HA pair must share the same Virtual IP. The Virtual IP and the LAN
AdministrationIPm
ustb
eu
nderthes amen
etwork.
LAN
This setting specifies a LAN IP address to be used for accessing administration
Administration
functionality.T hisa
ddresss houldb eu
niquew ithintheL AN.
IP
SubnetM
ask Thiss ettings pecifiesthes ubnetm
asko
ftheL
AN.
ImportantN
ote
For Pepwave routers in NAT mode, the virtual IP (VIP) should be set as
the
default
gateway for
all
hosts on the LAN segment. For example, a firewall sitting behind the
Pepwave router
should
set
its
defaultg atewaya sthev irtualIPinsteado
ftheIPo fthem
asterr outer.
Ind
rop-inm
ode,n
oo
therc onfigurationn
eedstob
es et.
Please note
that
the
drop-in
WAN
cannot
be
configured
as
a LAN
bypass
port
while
it
is
configured
for
higha
vailability.
24.2 CertificateM
anager
This
section
allows
for
certificates
to
be
assigned to
the
local
VPN,
Web
Admin SSL,
Captive
PortalS
SL,O
penVPNC A,W i-FiW
ANC lientc ertificatea ndW i-FiW
ANC
AC
ertificate.
The following knowledge base article describes how to create self-signed certificates and
importittoa
P
eplinkP
roduct.
https://forum.peplink.com/t/how-to-create-a-self-signed-certificate-and-import-it-to-a-peplink-pr
oduct/
24.3 ServiceF
orwarding
Serviceforwardings ettingsa tA
relocateda dvanced>Misc.S
ettings>ServiceF
orwarding.
S
erviceF
orwarding
When this option is enabled, all outgoing SMTP connections destined for
any host at TCP port 25 will be intercepted. These connections will be
SMTPF
orwarding
redirected to a specified SMTP server and port number. SMTP server
settingsfore achW ANc anb es pecifieda fters electingE
nable.
When this
option
is
enabled,
all
outgoing connections destined for the
proxy
server specified in Web Proxy Interception Settings will be intercepted.
WebP
roxy
These connections will be redirected to a specified web proxy server and
Forwarding port number. Web proxy interception settings and
proxy
server settings for
eachW ANc anb fters electingE
es pecifieda nable.
When this option is enabled, all outgoing DNS lookups will be
intercepted
and redirected to the built-in DNS name server. If
any LAN device is
using
the DNS name servers of
a WAN connection, you may want to
enable this
option to enhance the DNS availability without modifying the DNS server
DNSF
orwarding
setting of the clients. The built-in DNS name server will distribute DNS
lookups to
corresponding DNS servers of
all
available WAN connections. In
this
case, DNS service will not
be
interrupted, even if
any WAN connection
isd
own.
When custom service forwarding is enabled, outgoing traffic with the
CustomS
ervice
specified TCP
port
will
be
forwarded
to
a local
or
remote
server
by defining
Forwarding itsIPa
ddressa
ndp ortn umber.
24.3.1 SMTPF
orwarding
Some ISPs
require their
users
to send
e-mails
via
the
ISP’s
SMTP server. All
outgoing SMTP
connections are blocked except those connecting to the ISP’s. Pepwave routers support
intercepting and redirecting all outgoing SMTP connections (destined for
TCP port
25)
via
a
WANc onnectiontotheW AN’sc orrespondingS MTPs erver.
To enable the feature, select Enable under SMTP Forwarding Setup. Check Enable
Forwarding for
the
WAN connection(s) that
needs forwarding.
Under SMTP Server, enter
the
ISP’s e-mail
server host
name or
IP
address. SMTP
Under Port, enter
the
TCP
port number
fore
achW AN.
The Pepwave router will intercept SMTP connections. Choose a WAN port
according
to
the
outbound policy,
and then forward
the
connection to
the
SMTP server if
the
chosen WAN has
enabled forwarding. If
the forwarding is
disabled
for a WAN connection, SMTP connections for
theW
ANw illb
es implyb eforwardedtothec onnection’so riginald
estination.
Note
24.3.2 WebP
roxyForwarding
When this feature is enabled, the Pepwave router will intercept all outgoing connections
destined for
the
proxy server specified Web
in Proxy Interception Settings, choose a WAN
connection with
reference to
the outbound policy,
and
then
forward
them to the
specified web
proxy server and port number. Redirected server settings for each WAN can
be
set
here.
If
forwarding is disabled for a WAN, web proxy connections for the WAN will be simply
forwardedtothec onnection’so riginald
estination.
24.3.3 DNSF
orwarding
When DNS forwarding
is
enabled,
all
clients’
outgoing
DNS
requests
will
also
be
intercepted
andforwardedtotheb
uilt-inD
NSp
roxys erver.
24.3.4CustomS
erviceF
orwarding
After clicking the enable
checkbox, enter your TCP port
for
traffic
heading
to
the
router, and
thens pecifytheIPA ddressa ndP
orto
fthes ervery ouw ishtoforwardtothes erviceto.
24.4 ServiceP
assthrough
Service passthrough settings can be found at Advanced>Misc. Settings>Service
Passthrough.
Some Internet services need to be specially
handled
in
a multi-WAN environment. Pepwave
routers
can
handle these services such that
Internet
applications do
not notice being
behind
a
multi-WANr outer.S ettingsfors ervicep assthroughs upporta rea
vailableh ere.
ServiceP
assthroughS
upport
The Pepwave router monitors outgoing TFTP connections and routes any
TFTP incoming TFTP data packets back to the client. Select Enable if you
want
to
enableT FTPp assthroughs upport.
This field is for enabling the support of IPsec NAT-T passthrough.
UDP
ports
500, 4500, and 10000 are monitored by default. You may add more custom
IPsecN
AT-T data ports that your IPsec system uses by checking Define custom ports. If
the
VPN contains IPsec
site-to-site VPN check Route
traffic, IPsec
Site-to-Site
VPN and choosethe WANc onnectiontor outethetrafficto.
24.5 UART
Selected Pepwave MAX routers feature a RS-232 serial interface on the built-in terminal
block. The RS-232 serial interface can be used to connect to a serial device and make it
accessibleo vera
nT
CP/IPn etwork.
The
serial
interface
can
be
enabled and
parameters can be
set
on the
web
admin page
under
Advanced> U
ART.M
akes uretheym atchthes eriald
evicey oua
rec onnectingto.
There are 4 pins
i.e.
TX,
RX,
RTS,
CTS
on
the
terminal
block
for
serial
connection
and
they
correspondtothep insina
D
B-9c onnectora
sfollows:
DB-9 PepwaveM
AXT
erminalB
lock
Pin1
–
Pin2
Rx( rated- +25V)
Pin3
Tx( rated- +12V)
Pin4
–
Pin5
–
Pin6
–
Pin7
RTS
Pin8
CTS
Pin9
–
The RS232 serial
interface
is
not
an
isolated
RS232.
External
galvanic
isolation
may
be
added
ifr equired.
Be sure to check whether your serial cable is a null modem cable, commonly known as
crossover cable,
or
a straight through
cable.
If
in
doubt, swap
Rx
and
Tx, and
RTS
and
CTS,
attheo
there nda
ndg iveita
notherg o.
Once connected, your
serial
device
should
be
accessible
on
your
Pepwave
MAX
router
LAN
IPa
ddressa
tthes pecifiedT
CPp ort.
24.6 GPSF
orwarding
Using the GPS forwarding feature, some Pepwave routers can automatically send GPS
reports to a specified server. To set up GPS forwarding, navigate to Advanced>GPS
Forwarding.
GPSF
orwarding
Enable Checkthisb
oxtoturno
nG
PSforwarding.
Enter the
name/IP
address of
the
server that
will receive GPS data.
Also
specify
Server a port
number, (U
protocol DP TCP),
or and
a report
interval
of
between 1 and
10s econds.C
lick tos avetheses ettings.
GPSR
eport
ChoosefromN
MEAo
rT
AIPformatfors endingG
PSr eports.
Format
NMEAS If you’ve chosen to send GPS reports in NMEA format, select one or more
entence
sentence types
for sending the (G
data PRMC, GPGGA, GPVTG, GPGSA, and
Type GPGSV).
TAIPS
entence If you’ve chosen to send GPS reports in TAIP format, select one or more
sentence types for sending the data (P
V—Position / Velocity Solution and
Type/TAIPID
CP—Compact Velocity Solution). You can also optionally include an ID
(optional) numberintheT AIPIDfield.
24.7 IgnitionS
ensing
IgnitionS
ensingd
etectstheignitions ignals tatuso
fa
v ehicleitisinstalledin.
This feature allows the cellular
router to
start
up or
shut
down when the
engine of that
vehicle
iss tartedo rturnedo ff.
The time delay setting between ignition off and power down of the router is a configurable
setting, which allows the router
to stay on
for
a period
of
time
after
the
engine of a vehicle
is
turnedo ff.
IgnitionS
ensinginstallation
Functoin ColourW
ire
IGNI/P connectedtop
ositivefeedo
ntheignition. Orange
DCIN
c onnectedtop
ermanentn
egativefeed( ground) Black
-
DCIN
connectedtop
ermanentp
ositivefeed ( power
Red
+ 12VDC,2
A)).
*Currentlyn
otfunctional;w
illb
eu
sedfora
dditionalfeaturesinfuturefirmware
Connectivityd
iagramf ord
evicesw
ith4
-pinc
onnector
Connectivityd
iagramf ord
evicesw
itht erminalb
lockc
onnection
GPIOM
enu
Note:T
hisf eatureisa
pplicablef orc
ertainm
odelst hatc
omew
itha PIOinterface.
G
IgnitionS
ensingo ptionsc anb efoundinA dvanced > G
PIO.
Thec onfigurableo ptionforIgnitionInputisD elay;thetimeins econdsthatther outers tays
poweredo na
ftertheignitionisturnedo ff.
The O/P
(connected to
the
I/O
pin
on
a 4 pin
connector)
can
be
configured
as
a digital
input,
a
digitalo
utput,o
ra
na
naloginput.
Digital Input - the connection supports input sensing; it reads the external input and
determinesifthes ettingss houldb e'High'( on)o
r'Low'( off).
Digital Output - when there is a healthy
WAN connection,
the
output
pin
is
marked
as
'High'
(on).O
therwise,itw illb
em
arkeda s'Low'( off).
Note:T
heD
igitalO utputs
tate( on/off)u
ponr ebootingt hed
evicem ayv
aryd ependingo nt hem
odel,e
g.
MAXB R1M K2= P
ersistent;M AXT ransitM
iniw ithC
ontentHub= R
esett od tc.
efault,e
Analog Input
- to
be
confirmed.
In
most
cases,
it
should
read
the
external
input
and
determine
thev oltagelevel.
24.8 NTPS
erver
Pepwave routers
can
now serve
as
a local
NTP server.
Upon start
up,
it
is
now
able
to
provide
connected devices with
the
accurate
time,
precise
UTC from
either an
external NTP
server
or
viaG
PSa
nde nsuringthatc onnectedd evicesa lwaysr eceivethec orrecttime.
Compatiblew
ith:B
R1E
NT,7
00H
W3,H
D2/4,T
ransit
NTPS efoundv ia: A
ervers ettingc anb dvanced>Misc.S
ettings>NTPS
erver
TimeS
ettingsc anb tS
efounda ystem>Time>TimeS
ettings
24.9 GroupedN
etworks
Advanced>
G
roupedN
etworksa
llowstoc onfigured
estinationn
etworksing
roupedformat.
Select Add group to create a new group with single IPaddresses or subnets from different
VLANs.
Thec reatedn
etworkg
roupsc anb
eu
sedino
utboundp
olicies,firewallr ules.
24.10RemoteS
IMM
anagement
TheR
emoteS
IMm anagementisa ccessiblev iaA
dvanced>
M
iscS
ettings>
R
emoteS
IM
Management.B yd
efault,thisfeatureisd
isabled.
Pleasen otethata
limitedn
umbero
fP
epwaver outerss upporttheS
IMInjector,m
ayr eferto
thelink:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/products/sim-injector/o rA
ppendixB
form
ored
etailso
n
FusionSIMM anual.
RemoteS
IMH
ostS
ettings
RemoteS
IMH
ostS
ettings
ActiveL
AN
Checkthisb
oxtoe
nableA
utoL
ANd
iscoveryo
fther emoteS
IMs erver..
Discovery
RemoteS
IM
Enter the
public IP address of
the
SIM
Injector.
If
you
enter
IP
addresses
here,
it
is
Host notn ecessary t
o t
ick t
he“ A
uto L
AN D
iscovery ” b ox a
bove.
Youm
ayd
efinetheR
emoteS yc lickingthe“ A
IMinformationb ddR
emoteS
IM”.H
ere,y ou
nableD
cane ataR oaminga
ndc
ustomA PNfory ourS
IMc ards.
AddR
emoteS
IMS
ettings
SIMS
erver Adda
n
ewS
IMS
erver
SIMS
erver- S
erial
Enterthes erialn
umbero
fS
IMS
erver
Number
SIMS
erver- N
ame Thiso
ptionalfielda
llowsy oud
efinea
n
amefortheS erver
IMS
Click the drop-down menu and choose which SIM slot you want to
SIMS
lot
connect.
SIMS
lot- N
ame Thiso
ptionalfielda
llowsy oud
efinea
n IMs lot.
amefortheS
DataR
oaming Enablesd
atar oamingo
nthisp IMc ard.
articularS
24.11 SIMT
oolkit
The SIM Toolkit, accessible via Advanced > Misc Settings > SIM Toolkit, supports two
functionalities,U SSDa ndS
MS.
USSD
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) is a protocol used by mobile phones to
communicate with their service provider’s computers. One of the most common uses is to
querythea
vailableb
alance.
Entery ourU ndertheU
SSDc odeu SSDC
odetextfielda
ndc lickS
ubmit.
Youw
illr eceivea
c onfirmation.T MSr esponse,c lickG
oc hecktheS et.
Aftera
fewm
inutesy ouw
illr eceivea
r esponsetoy ourU
SSDc ode
SMS
The SMS option allows
you
to
read
SMS
(text)
messages
that
have
been
sent
to
the
SIM
in
yourP epwaver outer.
25 AP
25.1 APC
ontroller
TheA Pc ontrollera ctsa
sa c entralizedc ontrollero fP
epwaveA ccessP oints.
With this feature, users can customize and manage up
to
1500
Access Points
from
a single
Pepwaver outerinterface.
Toc onfigure,n avigatetotheA Ptab.a
ndthefollowings creena ppears.
APC
ontroller
The
AP controller for
managing Pepwave APs can be
enabled by
checking this box.
When this
option is
enabled, the AP controller will wait
for
management connections
originating from APs over
the
LAN on TCP and UDP port
11753. It will
also wait for
APM
anagement
captive portal connections on TCP port 443. An extended DHCP option, CAPWAP
Access Controller addresses (field 138), will be added to
the
DHCP server. A local
DNSr ecord,A PC ontroller,w illb
ea ddedtothelocalD NSp roxy.
Access
points
to
manage
can
be
specified
here. Any
If is
selected,
the
AP
controller
PermittedA
P will manage any AP that reports to it. If Approved
List
is
selected,
only
APs
with
serialn
umberslistedinthep
rovidedtextb
oxw
illb
em
anaged.
25.2 WirelessS
SID
Current SSID information appears in SSID
the section. To edit
an existing
SSID, click its
name
inthelist.T
oa dda n SID,c lickAdd.N
ewS otethatthefollowings ettingsv aryb ym
odel.
The below settings ishows a new SSID window with
Advanced Settings
enabled (these are
availableb ys electingtheq uestionm arkinthetopr ightc orner).
SSIDS
ettings
This setting specifies the SSID of the virtual AP to be scanned by Wi-Fi
SSID
clients.
Enable Clickthed
rop-downm
enutoa
pplya
times cheduletothisinterface
This setting specifies the VLAN ID to be tagged on all outgoing packets
generated from this
wireless network (i.e.,
packets that
travel
from
the Wi-Fi
VLAN segment through the
Pepwave AP One unit to the Ethernet segment via
the
LAN port).
The default value
of
this
setting is 0, which
means VLAN tagging
isd
isabled( insteado ftaggedw ithz ero).
This
setting
specifies
whether
or
not
Wi-Fi
clients
can
scan the
SSID
of
this
BroadcastS
SID
wirelessn etwork.B roadcastS SIDise nabledb efault.
yd
This setting specifies the transmit rate to be used for sending multicast
MulticastR
ateA network traffic. The selected Protocol and Channel Bonding settings
will
affectther ateo ptionsa ndv aluesa
vailableh ere.
To
allow
the
Pepwave router to listen
to
internet
group
management
protocol
IGMPS
noopingA
(IGMP)n etworktraffic,s electthiso ption.
If
you
use
a distributed
DHCP
server/relay
environment,
you
can
enable
this
DHCPO
ption8
2A
option to provide additional information on the
manner
in
which
clients
are
etwork.
physicallyc onnectedtothen
Layer 2 refers to the second layer in the ISO Open System Interconnect
model.
Layer2 When
IsolationA this
option
is
enabled,
clients
on
the
same
VLAN,
SSID,
or
subnet
are
isolated to that
VLAN, SSID, or
subnet,
which
can
enhance security. Traffic
is passed to the upper communication layer(s). By default, the setting is
disabled.
MaximumN
umbero f
Indicate the maximum number of clients that should be
able
to
connect
to
Clients each f
requency.
A
- A
dvancedfeature.C
lickthe b
uttono
nthetopr ight-handc ornertoa
ctivate.
SecurityS
ettings
● WPA/WPA2–
E
nterprise
When WPA/WPA2 - Enterprise is configured, RADIUS-based 802.1 x
authentication is enabled. Under this configuration, the Shared Key option
should
be
disabled.
When using
this method, select
the
appropriate version using V1/V
the 2
controls.T
hes ecuritylevelo fthism
ethodisk nowntob ev eryh
igh.
When WPA/WPA2- Personal is
configured,
a shared key is
used
for
data encryption
and
authentication. When
using this
configuration, Shared
the Key
option should be
enabled. Key length must be between eight and 63 characters (inclusive). The
securitylevelo
fthism ethodisk nowntob
eh
igh.
NOTE:
When WPA2/WPA3- Personal
is
configured,
if
a managed
AP
which
is
NOT
WPA3
PSK capable,
the
AP
Controller
will
not
push
those WPA3
and
WPA2/WPA3 SSID
to
thatA
P.
AccessC
ontrol
Connection coming from the MAC addresses in this list will be either denied or
MACA
ddress
acceptedb asedo ntheo
ptions electedinthep reviousfield.
List If
more
than
one
MAC address needs
to
be
entered,
you
can use
a carriage
return
tos eparatethem.
RADIUSS
erverS
ettings
Enter the IP address of the primary RADIUS server and, if applicable, the
Host
secondaryR ADIUSs erver.
Enter the RADIUS shared secret for the primary server and, if applicable, the
Secret
secondaryR ADIUSs erver.
Authentication
In the
field,
enter
the
UDP authentication port(s)
used
by
your
RADIUS
server(s)
or
Port clicktheD efaultb nter1
uttontoe 812.
Accounting In the field, enter the UDP accounting port(s) used by your RADIUS server(s) or
Port clicktheD efaultb uttontoe nter1 813.
25.3 WirelessM
esh
WirelessM eshS upportisa
vailableo nd evicesr unning8 02.11ac( Wi-Fi5 )a
nda
bove.A long
withtheA
PC
ontroller,m eshn etworke xtensionsc anb ee stablished,w hichc ane xpand
networkc overage.N otethattheW
irelessM eshs ettingsn eedtom
atchtheM eshIDa nd
SharedK eyo ftheo
therd eviceso nthes ames electedfrequencyb and.
Toc reatea
n
ewW
irelessM
eshp otoA
rofile,g P>
W
irelessM
esh,a
ndc lickA
dd.
WirelessM
eshS
ettings
MeshID Entera
n
ametor epresenttheM
eshp
rofile.
Frequency Selectthe2
.4GHzo
r5
GHzfrequencytob
eu
sed.
25.4 Settings
On many Pepwave models, the AP settings screen (A
P>Settings) looks similar to the
exampleb elow:
APS
ettings
This
drop-down menu specifies the
national / regional regulations which the AP
shouldfollow.
● If a North American region is selected, RF channels 1 to 11 will be
available and the maximum transmission power will be 26 dBm (400
mW).
OperatingC
ountry ● If European region is selected, RF channels 1 to 13
will
be
available.
Them aximumtransmissionp owerw illb e2
0d
Bm( 100m W).
Note: Users are required to choose an option suitable to local laws and
regulations.
Per FCC regulation, the country selection is not available on all models
marketedintheU S.A llU
Sm
odelsa refixedtoU
Sc hannelso nly.
There are three options: 20 MHz, 20/40 MHz, and 40 MHz. With this
feature
ChannelW
idth enabled, the Wi-Fi system can
use
two
channels
at
once.
Using
two
channels
improvesthep
erformanceo
ftheW
i-Fic onnection.
This drop-down menu selects the 802.11 channel to be utilized. Available
options are from 1 to 11 and from 1 to 13 for the North America region and
Europe region, respectively. (Channel 14 is
only available when the
country
is
Channel
selected as
Japan with protocol 802.11b.) Auto
If is
set,
the system will
perform
channel scanning based on the scheduled time set and choose the most
suitablec hannela utomatically.
AutoC
hannel
Indicatethetimeo
fd
aya
tw
hichu
pdatea
utomaticc hannels election.
Update
This drop-down menu determines the power at
which the
AP
under
this
profile
will broadcast. When fixed settings are selected, the AP will broadcast at
the
specified power level, regardless of context. When Dynamic settings are
selected, the AP will adjust its power level based on its surrounding APs in
order t
om
aximize p
erformance.
OutputP
owerA
The Dynamic: Auto setting will
set the AP
to
do this
automatically.
Otherwise,
the Dynamic: Manual setting will set the AP to dynamically adjust only if
instructed to do so. If you have set Dynamic:Manual, you can go to
AP>Toolbox>AutoP owerA dj.tog ivey ourA Pfurtherinstructions.
If you click the Boost checkbox, the AP under this profile will transmit using
additional power. Please note that using this option with several APs
in
close
proximityw illleadtoincreasedinterference.
ClientS
ignal
This field determines that maximum signal strength each individual client will
Strength receive.T hem easurementu nitism
egawatts.
ThresholdA
Maxn
umbero f
This
field
determines
the
maximum
clients
that
can
be
connected
to
APs
under
ClientsA thisp
rofile.
This
field
specifies the
VLAN ID
to
tag
to
management traffic,
such
as
AP to
AP
controller communication traffic. The value is 0 by default, meaning that no
ManagementV LAN
VLANtaggingw illb
ea pplied.
ID
Note: change this value with caution as alterations may result in loss of
connectiontotheA Pc ontroller.
Operating
Choose from
the schedules that
you
have defined System>Schedule. Select
in
Schedule thes chedulefortheintegratedA Ptofollowfromthed
rop-downm
enu.
This
drop-down menu
provides the
option
to
set
the
time
between
each
beacon
BeaconIntervalA
send.A vailableo
ptionsa re1
00ms,2 50ms,a nd5
00ms.
This field
provides
the
option
to
set
the
frequency for beacon
to
include delivery
DTIMA
trafficindicationm essage( DTIM).T heintervalu
nitism
easuredinm
illiseconds.
This
field
provides
the
option
to
set
the
minimum packet size
for
the
unit
to
send
RTST
hresholdA
anR
TSu singtheR
TS/CTSh andshake.S etting0
d
isablesthisfeature.
Fragmentation Determines the maximum size (in bytes) that each packet fragment will be
Threshold
A brokend
owninto.S et0
tod
isablefragmentation.
Distance/Time Select the distance you want your Wi-Fi to cover in
order
to
adjust
the
below
Converter
A parameters.D efaultv aluesa rer ecommended.
This
field
provides the option
to
modify
the
unit
wait
time
before
it
transmits.
The
SlotT
imeA
μ
defaultv alueis9 s.
Frame With
this
feature
enabled, throughput
will
be
increased
by
sending
two
or
more
AggregationA dataframesina
s ingletransmission.
This
field
is
only
available Frame
when Aggregation is
enabled. It
specifies
the
FrameL
ength
framelengthforframea ggregation.B efault,itiss etto5
yd 0000.
A
- A
dvancedfeature.C
lickthe b
uttono
nthetopr ight-handc ornertoa
ctivate.
WebA
dministrationS
ettings
WebA
ccess These buttons specify the web access protocol used for accessing the web
Protocol admino ftheA
P.T
hetwoa vailableo ptionsa reH
TTPa ndH TTPS.
ManagementP
ort Thisfields pecifiesthem
anagementp
ortu
sedfora
ccessingthed
evice.
HTTPt oH This option will be available if you have chosen HTTPS as the Web Access
TTPS
Protocol. With this enabled, any HTTP access to
the
web
admin will
redirect
to
Redirection HTTPSa utomatically.
This field specifies the administrator username of the web admin. It is set
as
AdminU
serN
ame
adminb yd efault.
This field allows you to specify a new administrator password. You may also
AdminP
assword click the Generate button and let the system generate a random password
automatically.
Navigating to AP>Settings on some Pepwave models displays a screen similar to the one
shownb
elow:
Wi-FiR
adioS
ettings
Operating
Thiso
ptions etsthec ountryw
hoser egulationstheP
epwaver outerfollows.
Country
Wi-FiA
ntenna Choosefromther outer'sinternalo
ro
ptionale
xternala
ntennas,ifs oe
quipped.
ImportantN
ote
PerF
CCr egulations,thec ountrys electionisn
ota
vailableo
na
llm
odelsm
arketedintheU
S.A
llU
S
modelsa
refixedtoU
Sc hannelso
nly.
Wi-FiA
PS
ettings
This option allows you to specify whether 802.11b and/or 802.11g client
Protocol association requests will be accepted. Available options are 802.11ng and
802.11na. Byd efault,8 02.11ngiss elected.
This option allows you to select which 802.11 RF channel will be used.
Channel
Channel1 ( 2.412G
Hz)iss electedb yd
efault.
Auto (20/40 MHz) and 20 MHz are available. The default setting is Auto
ChannelW
idth
(20/40M Hz),w
hicha
llowsb othw idthstob eu
seds imultaneously.
This option is for specifying the transmission output power for the
Wi-Fi AP.
There are 4 relative power
levels – Max, High, Mid, and
available Low. The
OutputP
ower
actual output power will be bound by the regulatory limits of the selected
country.
This
option is
for
setting
the
transmit
bit
rate
for
sending
a beacon.
By
default,
BeaconR
ateA
1Mbpsiss elected.
This option is for setting the time interval between
each
beacon.
By
default,
BeaconIntervalA
100msiss elected.
This field
allows
you to
set
the
frequency
for
the
beacon
to
include
a delivery
DTIMA traffic indication message. The interval is measured in milliseconds. The
defaultv alueiss etto1 m
s.
This
field
is
for
specifying the wait time
before
the
Router
transmits
a packet.
SlotT
imeA
efault,thisfieldiss etto9
Byd µ
s.
This field is for setting the wait time to receive an
acknowledgement packet
ACKT
imeoutA
beforep erforminga r etransmission.B yd efault,thisfieldiss etto4
8µ
s.
Frame This option allows you to
enable
frame
aggregation
to
increase
transmission
AggregationA throughput.
This setting allows choosing a short or long guard period interval for your
GuardIntervalA
transmissions.
A
- A
dvancedfeature,p
leasec lickthe b
uttono
nthetopr ight-handc ornertoa
ctivate.
26 APControllerStatus
26.1 Info
A comprehensive overview of your AP can be accessed by navigating to AP > Controller
Status> Info.
APC
ontroller
This
field
displays
the
maximum number
of
AP
your
Balance router can
control.
LicenseL
imit
Youc anp urchaselicensestoincreasethen
umbero
fA
Py ouc anm
anage.
Underneath, there are two check boxes labeled 2.4 Ghz and 5 Ghz. Clicking
either
box will
toggle the
display of
information for that
frequency. By default,
the
Frequency
graphs display the number of clients and data usage for both 2.4GHz and 5
GHzfrequencies.
The colored boxes indicate the SSID to display information for. Clicking any
SSID colored box will toggle the display of information for that
SSID.
By
default,
all
theg
raphss howinformationfora llS
SIDs.
This pie
chart
and
table
indicates
how
many
APs
are
online
and
how
many
are
No.o
fA
Ps
offline.
No.ofC
lients This graph displays the number of clients connected to each network at any
given time. Mouse over any line on the graph to see how many clients
connectedtoa s pecificS
SIDforthatp
ointintime.
Events
Thise
ventlogd isplaysa lla
ctivityo
ny ourA
Pn etwork,d lickV
owntothec lientlevel.C iewA
lertstos ee
onlya ndc licktheM
lerts,a ore…linkfora dditionalr ecords.
26.2 AccessPoint(Usage)
Ad
etailedb
reakdowno
fd
atau
sagefore
achA
Pisa tA
vailablea P>
C
ontrollerS
tatus>
AccessP oint.
Usage
APN This
ame/Serial field
enables you to quickly find
your
device if
you
know
its
name or
serial
number. Fill in the field to begin searching. Partial names
and serial
numbers
Number ares upported.
OnlineS
tatus Thisb
uttontogglesw
hethery ours earchw
illincludeo
fflined
evices.
This table shows the detailed information on each AP, including channel,
number of clients, upload traffic, and
download traffic.
Click
the
blue
arrows
at
the left of the table to
expand
and
collapse
information on
each device
group.
You could also expand and collapse
all
groups
by
using
the
buttons.
Onther ighto
fthetable,y ouw
ills eethefollowingicons: .
Clickthe icontos eea
u
sagetablefore
achc lient:
ManagedW
ireless
Devices
Clickthe icontoc onfiguree
achc lient
For easier network management, you can give each client a name and
designate its
location.
You
can also
designate
which
firmware pack
(if
any)
this
clientw illfollow,a sw
ella
sthec hannelso nw
hichthec lientw
illb roadcast.
Clickthe icontos eea
g
raphd
isplayingu
sage:
Click
any
point
in
the graphs to
display
detailed usage and
client
information for
that
device, using that SSID, at
that
point
in
time. On
the Data
Usage by
menu,
youc and isplaytheinformationb yS
SIDo rb
yA
Ps end/receiver ate.
Click Event
the tab next Wireless
to Usage to
view a detailed event log
for
that
particulard
evice:
26.3 WirelessSSID
In-depthS
SIDr eportsa
rea nderA
vailableu P>
C
ontrollerS
tatus>
W
irelessS
SID.
Clicktheb
luea
rrowo
na
nyS
SIDtoo
btainm
ored
etailedu
sageinformationo
ne
achS
SID.
26.4 Mesh/WDS
Mesh/W DSa llowsy outom onitorthes tatuso fy ourw irelessd istributions ystem( WDS)o r
Mesh,a ndtracka ctivityb
yM
ACa ddressb avigatingtoA
yn P> C
ontrollerS tatus> M
esh/
WDS.T histables howsthed etailedinformationo fe
achA P,includingp rotocol,transmitr ate
(sent/r eceived),s ignals trength,a ndd uration.
26.5 WirelessClient
You
can search
for
specific
Wi-Fi
users
by
navigating AP
to > Controller
Status
> Wireless
Client.
Here, you will be able to see your network’s heaviest users as well as search for specific
users. Click the icon to bookmark specific users, and click the icon for additional
detailsa boute achu ser:
26.6 NearbyDevice
A
listing
of
near
devices
can
be
accessed
by
navigating AP
to > Controller
Status
> Nearby
Device.
SuspectedR
ogueD
evices
Hovering over the device MAC address will
result
in
a popup
with
information
on
how this
device
was
detected.C lickthe iconsa
ndthed
evicew illb
em ovedtotheb
ottomtableo fidentifiedd evices.
26.7 EventLog
Youc ana
ccesstheA
PC
ontrollerE
ventlogb avigatingtoA
yn P>
C
ontrollerS
tatus>
E
vent
Log.
Events
This event log displays all activity on your AP network, down to the client level. Use to filter box to
search by MAC address, SSID, AP Serial Number, or
AP
Profile
name. Click View Alerts to see only
alerts,a ndc licktheM ore…linkfora dditionalr ecords.
27 Toolbox
Toolsform
anagingfirmwarep
acksc anb tA
efounda P>Toolbox.
FirmwareP
acks
Here, you can manage the firmware of your AP. Clicking
on
will
result
in
information
regarding
each
firmware pack. To
receive new firmware packs, you
can
click Check for
Updates to
download new
packs, or you can click Manual Upload to manually upload a firmware pack. Click Default to
define
whichfirmwarep ackisd
efault.
28 SystemS
ettings
28.1 AdminS
ecurity
There
are
two types
of
user
accounts available for
accessing the
web admin: admin and user.
They represent two user levels: the admin level has full administrative access, while the
user level is read-only. The user
level
can
access
only
the
device's
status
information;
users
cannotm akea nyc hangeso nthed evice.
A web login session will be logged out automatically when it has been idle longer than the
Web Session Timeout. Before the session expires, you may click Logout
the button in
the
weba dmintoe xitthes ession.
0 hours 0 minutes signifies an unlimited session time. This setting should be used only in
special situations, as it will lower the system security level if users do not log out before
closingtheb hed
rowser.T efaultis4 h ours,0 m
inutes.
For security reasons, after logging in to the web admin Interface for the first time, it is
recommended to
change the
administrator password. Configuring the
administration interface
to be accessible only from the LAN can further improve system security. Administrative
settingsc onfigurationislocateda tS ystem>AdminS ecurity.
AdminS
ettings
This field allows you to define a name for this Pepwave router. By default,
RouterN
ame Router Name is set as MAX_XXXX, where
XXXX
refers
to
the
last
4 digits
of
theu umber.
nit’ss erialn
AdminU
ser
AdminU
serN
ameiss eta
sa
dminb
yd
efault,b
utc anb
ec hanged,ifd
esired.
Name
AdminP
assword Thisfielda
llowsy outos pecifya
n
ewa
dministratorp
assword.
ConfirmA
dmin
Thisfielda
llowsy outov erifya
ndc onfirmthen
ewa
dministratorp
assword.
Password
Read-onlyU
ser
Read-onlyU
serN
ameiss eta
su
serb
yd
efault,b
utc anb
ec hanged,ifd
esired.
Name
This
field
allows
you to
specify
a new
user
password.
Once
the
user
password
is
UserP
assword
set,ther ead-onlyu serfeaturew
illb
ee
nabled.
ConfirmU
ser
Thisfielda
llowsy outov erifya
ndc onfirmthen
ewu
serp
assword.
Password
WebS This field specifies the number of hours and minutes that a web session can
ession
remain idle before the Pepwave router
terminates its
access to
the
web
admin
Timeout interface.B efault,itiss etto4
yd h
ours.
With this box is checked, the web admin will authenticate using an external
RADIUS server. Authenticated users are treated as either "admin" with full
read-write permission or “user” with read-only access. Local admin and user
Authentication
accounts will
be disabled.
When the
device
is
not able
to
communicate with
the
byR
ADIUS external RADIUS server, local accounts will be enabled again for emergency
access. Additional authentication options will be available once this box is
checked.
AuthS
erver Thiss pecifiesthea
ccessa
ddressa
ndp
orto
fthee
xternalR
ADIUSs erver.
AuthS
erver
Thisfieldisfore
nteringthes ecretk eyfora
ccessingtheR
ADIUSs erver.
Secret
AuthT
imeout Thiso
ptions pecifiesthetimev aluefora
uthenticationtimeout.
Accounting
Thiss pecifiesthea
ccessa
ddressa
ndp
orto
fthee
xternala
ccountings erver.
Server
Accounting
Thisfieldisfore
nteringthes ecretk eyfora
ccessingthea
ccountings erver.
ServerS
ecret
Network
This option is for specifying the network connection to be used for
Connection authentication.U sersc anc hoosefromL AN,W
AN,a ndV
PNc onnections.
The CLI
(command line
interface)
can
be
accessed via
SSH.
This field enables
CLIS
SH
CLI support. For additional information regarding CLI, please refer to Section
30.5.
CLIS
SHP
ort Thisfieldd
eterminesthep
orto
nw
hichc lientsc ana
ccessC
LIS
SH.
This menu allows you to choose between granting access to LAN and WAN
CLIS
SHA
ccess
clients,o
rtoL
ANc lientso nly.
This option is for specifying the protocol(s) through which the web admin
interfacec anb ea ccessed:
Security ● HTTP
● HTTPS
● HTTP/HTTPS
This
field
is
for
specifying
the
port
number
on
which
the
web
admin
interface
can
WebA
dminP
ort
bea
ccessed.
WebA
dmin
This
option
is
for
specifying
the
network
interfaces
through
which
the
web
admin
Access interfacec anb
ea
ccessed:
● LANo
nly
● LAN/WAN
If LAN/WAN is chosen, the WAN Connection Access Settings form will be
displayed.
LANC
onnectionA
ccessS
ettings
AllowedL
AN
Thisfielda
llowsy outop
ermito
nlys pecificn
etworkso
rV
LANstoa
ccesstheW
ebU
I.
Networks
WANC
onnectionA
ccessS
ettings
Thisfielda
llowsy outor estrictw
eba
dmina
ccesso
nlyfromd
efinedIPs ubnets.
● Any - Allow web admin accesses to be from anywhere, without IP
addressr estriction.
● Allow access from the following IP
subnets only - Restrict
web
admin
access only from the defined IP subnets. When this is
chosen,
a text
AllowedS ource
inputa
reaw
illb ed
isplayedb eneath:
IPS
ubnets
The allowed
IP
subnet addresses should be
entered
into this
text area.
Each IP
subnet must be in form of w.x.y.z/m, where w.x.y.z is an IP address (e.g.,
192.168.0.0), and m is
the
subnet mask in CIDR format, which is
between 0 and
32inclusively( Fore xample,1 92.168.0.0/24).
Tod
efinem
ultiples ubnets,s eparatee
achIPs ubneto
neina
line.F
ore
xample:
● 192.168.0.0/24
● 10.8.0.0/16
28.2 Firmware
Webadmininterface:automaticallycheckforupdates
Upgradingfirmwarec anb ed
oneino
neo
fthreew
ays.
Using
the
router’s
interface to
automatically check
for
an update, using
the
router’s interface
to
manuallyu
pgradethefirmware,o ru
singInControl2top usha
nu
pgradetoa
r outer.
Thea
utomaticu
pgradec anb onefromS
ed ystem>
F
irmware.
If an update is found the buttons will change to allow you to Download and Update the
firmware.
Click on Download
the and
Upgrade button.
A prompt will
be
displayed advising to
download
the Current Active Configuration. Please click on the underlined download text. After
downloadingthec urrentc onfigc licktheO
kb
uttontos tarttheu
pgradep rocess.
The router will download and then apply the firmware. The time that this process
takes
will
dependo ny ourinternetc onnection’ss peed.
The
firmware will
now
be
applied to
the
router*.
The
amount
of
time
it
takes
for
the
firmware
to
upgradew illa
lsod ependo
nther outerthat’sb
eingu
pgraded.
*Upgradingt hef irmwarew
illc
auset her outert or eboot.
Webadmininterface:installu
pdatesmanually
In some cases, a special
build
may be
provided via a ticket
or it
may be
found in
the
forum.
Upgrading to the special build can be done using this method, or using
IC2 if
you are
using
that to
manage your
firmware upgrades. A manual upgrade using the
GA firmware posted on
thes item aya
lsob er ecommendedo rr equiredfora c oupleo fr easons.
All of the Peplink/Pepwave GA firmware
can be
found here
Navigate
to
the
relevant product
line (ie. Balance, Max, FusionHub, SOHO, etc). Some product lines may have a dropdown
thatlistsa llo
fthep
roductsinthatp roductline.H
ereisa
s creenshotfromtheB alanceline.
If the device has more than one firmware version the current hardware revision will be
requiredtok noww hatfirmwaretod ownload.
Navigate to
System > Firmware and
click
the
Choose File
button
under
the
Manual Firmware
Upgrade section. Navigate to the location that the firmware was downloaded to select the
“.img”filea ndc licktheO penb
utton.
Clicko
ntheM
anualU
pgradeb
uttontos tarttheu
pgradep
rocess.
A
prompt
will
be
displayed
advising
to
download
the
Current
Active
Configuration.
Please
click
on the underlined download text. After downloading the
current
config
click
the
Ok
button
to
start the upgrade process.
The firmware will
now
be applied to
the
router*.
The amount of
time
ittakesforthefirmwaretou
pgradew illd
ependo nther outerthat’sb eingu
pgraded.
*Upgradingt hef irmwarew
illc
auset her outert or eboot.
TheInControlm
ethod
Describedinthisk nowledgebasea
rticleo
no
urforum.
28.3 Time
Time Settings enables the system clock of the Pepwave router to be synchronized with a
specifiedtimes erver.T
imes ettingsa relocateda tS
ystem>Time.
TimeS
ettings
This
specifies
the
time zone (along with
the
corresponding Daylight Savings Time
TimeZ
one scheme). The Time Zone value affects
the
time
stamps in
the Pepwave router’s
eventloga
nde
-mailn otifications.C heckS howa lltos howa ptions.
lltimez oneo
This
setting
specifies
the
NTP
network
time
server
to
be
utilized
by
the
Pepwave
TimeS
erver
router.
28.4 Schedule
Enable and disable different functions (such as WAN connections, outbound policy, and
firewalls at different times, based on a user-scheduled configuration
profile.
The
settings
for
thisa tS
relocateda ystem>
S
chedule
Enable scheduling,
and
then
click
on
your
schedule
name
or
on New
the Schedule
button
to
begin.
EditS
cheduleP
rofile
Click this checkbox to enable this schedule profile. Note that if this is disabled,
Enabling
thena nya ssociatedfeaturesw illa lsoh avetheirs chedulingd isabled.
Click
the
drop-down menu to
choose pre-defined
schedules as
your
starting
point.
Schedule Please note that upon selection, previous changes on the
schedule map
will
be
deleted.
Click on the desired times to enable features at that time period. You can hold
ScheduleM
ap
yourm ouseforfastere ntry.
28.5 EmailN
otification
Email
notification functionality provides a system
administrator with up-to-date information
on
network status. The settings for configuring email notifications are found at System>Email
Notification.
EmailN
otificationS
ettings
This setting specifies whether or not to enable email notification. If Enable is
checked, the Pepwave router
will
send email messages to
system administrators
Email
when the WAN status changes or when new firmware is
available. If Enable is
Notification not checked, email notification is disabled and the
Pepwave router
will not
send
emailm essages.
This
setting
specifies
the
SMTP
server
to
be
used
for
sending
email.
If
the
server
SMTPS
erver
requiresa uthentication,c heckR
equirea uthentication.
This
setting specifies
via
a drop-down
menu
one
of
the
following
valid
Connection
Security:
Connection
● None
Security
● STARTTLS
● SSL/TLS
SMTPU
ser This setting specifies the SMTP username and password while sending email.
Name/ These options are
shown only Require
if authentication
is
checked in SMTP
the
Password Servers etting.
ConfirmS
MTP
Thisfielda
llowsy outov erifya
ndc onfirmthen
ewa
dministratorp
assword.
Password
Sender’sE
mail
This setting specifies the email address the Pepwave router will use to send
Address reports.
Recipient’sE This
mail setting specifies
the email
address(es) to
which
the
Pepwave router
will
send
email notifications. For multiple recipients, separate
each
email
addresses using
Address nterk ey.
thee
After you have finished setting up email notifications, you can click the Test Email
Notification button
to
test
the
settings before
saving. Test
After Email Notification is
clicked,
youw
ills eethiss creentoc onfirmthes ettings:
Click Send Test Notification to confirm. In a few seconds, you will see a message with
detailedtestr esults.
28.6 EventL
og
Event log
functionality
enables
event
logging at
a specified
remote
syslog
server.
The
settings
forc onfiguringther emotes ystemlogc anb
efounda tS
ystem>EventL og.
EventL
ogS
ettings
This setting
specifies
whether
or
not
to
log
events
at
the
specified
remote
syslog
RemoteS
yslog
server.
RemoteS
yslog
Thiss ettings pecifiestheIPa
ddresso
rh
ostnameo
fther emotes yslogs erver.
Host
The
Pepwave router
can also
send
push
notifications
to
mobile devices that
have
PushE
vents
ourM
obileR
outerU tilityinstalled.C hecktheb
oxtoa
ctivatethisfeature.
URLL
ogging Thiss ettingistoe
nablee
ventlogginga
tthes pecifiedlogs erver.
URLL
ogging
Thiss ettings pecifiestheIPa
ddresso
rh
ostnameo
ftheU
RLlogs erver.
Host
SessionL
ogging Thiss ettingistoe
nablee
ventlogginga
tthes pecifiedlogs erver.
SessionL
ogging
Thiss ettings pecifiestheIPa
ddresso
rh
ostnameo
ftheS
essionlogs erver.
Host
28.7 SNMP
SNMP or simple network management protocol is an open standard that can be used to
collect information about the Pepwave router. SNMP configuration is located at
System>SNMP.
SNMPS
ettings
SNMPD
evice
Thisfields howsther outern
amed tS
efineda ystem>AdminS
ecurity.
Name
SNMPP
ort Thiso
ptions pecifiesthep
ortw
hichS
NMPw
illu
se.T
hed ortis1
efaultp 61.
SNMPv1 Thiso
ptiona
llowsy outoe
nableS
NMPv ersion1
.
SNMPv2 Thiso
ptiona
llowsy outoe
nableS
NMPv ersion2
.
SNMPv3 Thiso
ptiona
llowsy outoe
nableS
NMPv ersion3
.
To
add
a community
for
either
SNMPv1 or
SNMPv2, click Add
the SNMP Community
button
intheC
ommunityN ametable,u ponw
hichthefollowings creenisd
isplayed:
SNMPC
ommunityS
ettings
Community
Thiss ettings pecifiestheS
NMPc ommunityn
ame.
Name
AllowedS This
ource setting
specifies
a subnet from which
access to the
SNMP server
is
allowed.
Enter subnet address here (e.g., 192.168.1.0) and select the
appropriate subnet
SubnetA
ddress mask.
To
define
a user
name
for
SNMPv3, Add
click SNMP
User
in SNMPv3
the User
Name
table,
uponw hichthefollowings creenisd
isplayed:
SNMPv3U
serS
ettings
UserN
ame Thiss ettings pecifiesa
u
sern
ametob
eu
sedinS
NMPv3.
This setting specifies via a drop-down menu one of the following valid
authenticationp rotocols:
Authentication
● NONE
Protocol ● MD5
● SHA
WhenM
D5o
rS
HAiss elected,a
ne
ntryfieldw
illa
ppearforthep
assword.
This
setting
specifies
via
a drop-down
menu
one
of
the
following
valid
privacy
protocols:
PrivacyP
rotocol
● NONE
● DES
WhenD
ESiss elected,a
ne
ntryfieldw
illa
ppearforthep
assword.
28.8 SMSC
ontrol
SMS Control allows the user to control the device using SMS even if the modem does
not
have a data connection. The settings for configuring the SMS Control can be found at
System>SMSC ontrol.
SupportedM
odels
● Balance/MAX:* -LTE-E,* -LTEA-W,* -LTEA-P,* -LTE-MX
● EPX:* -LW*,* -LP*
Whenthisb
oxisc hecked,thed
evicew
illb
ea
llowedtotakea
ctionsa
ccordingtor eceived
commandsv iaS MS.
Makes urey ourm obilep
lans upportsS
MS,a
ndn
otethats omep
lansm
ayincura
dditional
chargesforthis.
SMSC ontrolc anr ebootd evicesa ndc onfigurec ellulars ettingso
vers ignallingc hannels,e
ven
ifthem
odemd oesn oth
avea
d
atac onnection.
Ford
etailso
fs upportedS
MSc ommands ets,p
leaser efertoo
urk nowledgeb
ase.
SMSC
ontrolS
ettings
This setting sets the password for authentication - maximum of 32 characters,
Password
whichc annotincludes emicolon( ;).
Optionally, you can add phone number(s) to the whitelist. Only matching
phone
WhiteL
ist numbers are allowed to issue SMS commands. Phone numbers must be in
the
E.164InternationalP honeN umbersformat.
28.9 InControl
InControl is a cloud-based service which allows you to manage all of your Peplink and
Pepwave devices with
one
unified
system.
With it,
you
can
generate reports, gather statistics,
andc onfigurey ourd evicesa utomatically.A
llo
fthisisn
owp
ossiblew
ithInControl.
When this check box is checked, the device's status information will be sent to
the
Peplink
InControl system. This device's
usage data
and configuration will
be
sent to
the system if
you
enablethefeaturesinthes ystem.
Alternately,
you
could
also
privately
host
InControl. Simply
check
the
box beside
the
“Privately
HostInControl”o
pen,a nde
ntertheIPA
ddresso
fy ourInControlH
ost.
You can sign up for an InControl account
at
https://incontrol2.peplink.com/. You
can
register
your devices under the account, monitor their status, see their usage reports, and receive
offlinen otifications.
28.10Configuration
Backing up
Pepwave
router
settings
immediately after
successful completion of
initial
setup
is
strongly recommended. The
functionality
to
download and
upload Pepwave router settings
is
tS
founda ystem>Configuration.N otethata vailableo ptionsv aryb
ym
odel.
C
onfiguration
Restore The Restore Factory Settings button is to reset the configuration to factory
default settings. After clicking the button, you will need to click the Apply
Configurationt o
ettings Changesb
FactoryS uttono nthetopr ightc ornertom
akethes ettingse ffective.
DownloadA ctive
ClickD
ownloadtob
ackupthec urrenta
ctives ettings.
Configurations
Upload In a high availability (HA) configuration, a Pepwave router can quickly load the
Configurations configuration o
f
i
ts
H
A c
ounterpart. T
o d
o
s
o,
c
lick t
he
U
pload
b utton.
A
fter
fromH igh loading the
settings, configure the
LAN IP address of
the Pepwave router so
that it
AvailabilityP
air is d
ifferent f
rom t
he H
Ac ounterpart.
28.11 FeatureA
dd-ons
Some Pepwave routers have features that can be activated upon purchase. Once the
purchase is
complete,
you
will
receive
an
activation
key.
Enter
the
key
in Activation
the Key
field,c lickA ctivate,a
ndthenc lickA
pplyC hanges.
28.12 Reboot
This page provides a reboot button for restarting the system. For maximum reliability, the
Pepwave router
can equip
with
two
copies of
firmware. Each copy can
be
a different
version.
You can select the firmware version you would like to reboot the device with.
The
firmware
markedw ith( Running)isthec urrents ystemb ootu pfirmware.
Pleasen
otet hata
f irmwareu
pgradew
illa artition.
lwaysr eplacet heinactivef irmwarep
29 T
ools
29.1 Ping
The
ping
test tool sends pings through a specific Ethernet interface or
a SpeedFusionTM VPN
connection. You can specify
the number of
pings in
the
field Number of
times, to
a maximum
number of 10 times. Packet Size can
be set
to
a maximum of
1472
bytes. The ping utility
is
locateda tS ystem>Tools>Ping,illustratedb elow:
Tip
A system administrator can use the ping utility to manually check the connectivity of a particular
LAN/WANc onnection.
29.2 TracerouteT
est
The
traceroute test
tool
traces
the
routing
path
to
the
destination
through
a particular
Ethernet
interface or a SpeedFusion connection. The traceroute test utility is located at
TM
System>Tools>Traceroute.
Tip
As ystema
dministratorc anu
sethetracerouteu
tilitytoa
nalyzethec onnectionp
atho
fa
L
AN/WAN
connection.
29.3 P
epVPNT
est
TheP
epVPNT
esttoolc anh
elptotestthethroughputb
etweend
ifferentV
PNp
eers.
You can
define Test
the Type, Direction, and
Duration of
the
test,
and Go!
press to perform
the
throughput test.
The VPN
test utility
is
located System>Tools>PepVPN
at Test, illustrated
asfollows:
29.4 Wake-on-LAN
Peplink
routers
can
send
special
“magic
packets”
to
any
client
specified
from
the
Web
UI.
To
avigatetoS
accessthisfeature,n ystem>
T
ools>
W
ake-on-LAN
Selecta
c lientfromthed ndc lickS
rop-downlista endtos enda
“ magicp
acket”
30 Status
30.1 Device
tS
Systeminformationislocateda tatus>Device.
SystemInformation
ProductC
ode Ify ourm
odelu
sesa
p
roductc ode,itw
illa
ppearh
ere.
Hardware
Thiss howstheh
ardwarev ersiono
fthisd
evice.
Revision
SerialN
umber Thiss howsthes erialn
umbero
fthisd
evice.
PepVPNV
ersion Thiss howsthec urrentP
epVPNv ersion.
ModemS
upport
This shows the modem support version. For a list of supported modems, click
Version ModemS upportL ist.
InControl
Managed InControlM
anagedC
onfigurations( firmware,V
LAN,C
aptiveP
ortal,e
tcetera)
Configuration
HostN
ame Theh
ostn
amea
ssignedtotheP
epwaver outera
ppearsh
ere.
SystemT
ime Thiss howsthec urrents ystemtime.
OpenVPNC lient
Link to download OpenVpn Client profile when this is enabled in Remote User
Profile Access
Diagnostic The Download link is for exporting a diagnostic report file required for system
Report investigation.
Remote
ClickT
urno
ntoe
nabler emotea
ssistance.
Assistance
The second table shows the MAC address of each LAN/WAN interface connected.
To
view
yourd
evice’sE
ndU
serL
icenseA
greement( EULA),c lick L
egal.
30.2 GPSD
ata
GPS enabled models automatically store up to seven days of GPS location data in GPS
eXchange format (GPX). To review this data using third-party applications, click
Status>D evicea ndthend
ownloady ourG
PXfile.
The Pepwave GPS enabled devices export real-time location data in NMEA format through
the
LAN IP
address at
TCP port
60660. It
is
accessible from
the LAN or
over a SpeedFusion
connection. To access the
data
via
a virtual serial
port,
install
a virtual serial
port driver.
Visit
http://www.peplink.com/index.php?view=faq&id=294tod ownloadthed river.
30.3 ActiveS
essions
Informationo
na
ctives essionsc anb tS
efounda tatus>ActiveS
essions>Overview.
This screen displays the number of sessions initiated by each application. Click on each
service listing for additional information. This screen also indicates the number of sessions
initiated by each WAN port. In addition, you can see which clients are initiating the most
sessions.
You can also perform a filtered search for specific sessions. You can filter by subnet, port,
protocol,a ndinterface.T op erforma s earch,n avigatetoStatus>ActiveS essions>Search.
This Active Sessions section displays the active inbound/outbound sessions of each
WAN
connection on the
Pepwave router.
A filter
is
available to
sort
active
session information.
Enter
ak eywordinthefieldo
rc hecko
neo
ftheW ANc onnectionb oxesforfiltering.
30.4 ClientL
ist
The client list table is located at Status>Client List. It lists DHCP and online client IP
addresses, names (retrieved from the DHCP reservation table or defined by users), current
downloada ndu ploadr ate,a ndM
ACa ddress.
Clients can be imported into the
DHCP reservation
table
by
clicking
the
button
on
the
right.Y
ouc anu pdatether ecorda fterimportb oingtoN
yg etwork>LAN.
If the PPTP server (see Section 19.2), SpeedFusionTM (see Section
12.1),
or
AP controller
(see Section 20) is enabled, you may see the corresponding connection
name listed
in
the
Namefield.
30.5 WINSC
lient
TheW tS
INSc lientlisttableislocateda tatus>WINSC
lient.
The
WINS client
table
lists
the
IP
addresses and
names of
WINS clients.
This option
will
only
be available when you have enabled the WINS server (navigation:
Network>Interfaces>LAN). The
names of
clients
retrieved will be
automatically matched into
theC
lientL
ist( seep reviouss ection).C lickF lushA lltoflusha llW
INSc lientr ecords.
30.6 UPnP/ N
AT-PMP
The table that shows the forwarded ports
under
UPnP and
NAT-PMP protocols is
located
at
Status>UPnP/NAT-PMP. This section appears
only
if
you have
enabled UPnP
/ NAT-PMP as
mentionedinS ection1 6.1.1.
Click
to
delete
a single UPnP / NAT-PMP record
in
its
corresponding
row.
To
delete
all
records,c lickD eleteA
llo nther ight-hands ideb
elowthetable.
ImportantN
ote
UPnP/N
AT-PMPr ecordsw illb
ed eletedimmediatelya
fterc lickingtheb
utton o rD
eleteA
ll,w
ithoutthe
needtoc lickS
aveo
rC
onfirm.
30.7 OSPF&
R
IPv2
Showss tatuso
fO
SPFa
ndR
IPv2
30.8 BGP
Showss tatuso
fB
GP
30.9 SpeedFusionS
tatus
CurrentS tS
peedFusionTM s tatusinformationislocateda tatus>SpeedFusionTM.
Detailsa
boutS
peedFusionTMconnection
p
eersa
ppearsa
sb
elow:
Click on the corresponding peer name to explore the
WAN
connection(s)
status
and
subnet
informationo fe achV
PNp
eer.
Whenp
ressingthe b
utton,thefollowingm
enuw ppear:
illa
TheS
peedfusions tatusp ages howsa llr elatedinformationa bouttheP
epVPNc onnection.
Thiss creena
lsoa
llowsy outor unP
epVPNT estsa llowingthroughputtests.
Peplink also published a whitepaper about Speedfusion which can
be
downloaded
from
the
followingu rl:
http://download.peplink.com/resources/whitepaper-speedfusion-and-best-practices-2019.pdf
30.10EventL
og
tS
Eventloginformationislocateda tatus>EventL
og.
31 WANQuality
The Status > WAN Quality allow to show detailed information
about
each
connected
WAN
connection.
For cellular connections it
shows
signal
strength,
quality,
throughput
and
latency
for
the
past
hour.
32 UsageReports
Thiss ections howsb andwidthu sages tatisticsa ndislocateda tS
tatus> U
sageR
eports
Bandwidth usage at the LAN while the device is switched off (e.g., LAN bypass) is neither
recordedn ors hown.
32.1 Real-Time
The Data transferred since installation table indicates
how much
network traffic
has
been
processed by
the
device
since
the
first
bootup. Data
The transferred since last reboot table
indicatesh owm uchn etworktraffich asb eenp rocessedb ythed
evices incethelastb ootup.
32.2 Hourly
This page shows the hourly bandwidth usage for all WAN connections, with the option of
viewing each individual connection. Select the desired connection to check from the
drop-downm enu.
32.3 Daily
This page shows the daily bandwidth usage for all WAN connections, with the option of
viewinge achindividualc onnection.
Select
the
connection to
check from
the
drop-down menu. If
you have enabled Bandwidth
the
Monitoring feature, the Current Billing C
ycle table for that WAN connection will be
displayed.
Click on a date to view the client bandwidth usage of that specific date. This feature is
not
available if you have selected to view the bandwidth usage of only a particular WAN
connection.T hes caleo ftheg raphc anb es ettod
isplaym egabytes( M B)o rg igabytes( G
B).
AllW
AND
ailyB
andwidthU
sage
32.4 Monthly
This page
shows the
monthly bandwidth usage for
each WAN connection. If
you
have enabled
the Bandwidth Monitoring feature, you can check the usage of
each
particular
connection
yB
andv iewtheinformationb illingC
ycleo yC
rb alendarM onth.
Click the first
two
rows to
view the
client
bandwidth usage
in
the last two
months. This
feature
is not available if you have chosen to view the
bandwidth of
an individual
WAN connection.
Thes caleo ftheg
raphc anb es ettod egabytes( M
isplaym B)o igabytes( G
rg B).
AllW
ANM
onthlyB
andwidthU
sage
EthernetW
ANM
onthlyB
andwidthU
sage
Tip
Byd
efault,thes caleo atas izeisinM
fd B.1
GBe
quals1
024MB.
AppendixA
:R
estorationo
fF
actoryD
efaults
Tor estorethefactoryd
efaults ettingso
na
P
epwaver outer,followthes tepsb
elow:
1. Locatether esetb
uttono
nthefronto
rb
ackp
anelo
ftheP
epwaver outer.
2. Witha
p
aperclip,p
ressa
ndk eepther esetb
uttonp
ressed.
Note:T
hereisad
ualfunctiontother esetb
utton.
Holdfor5
-10s econdsfora dminp asswordr eset( Note:T heL
EDs tatuslightb
linksinR
ED2
timesa ndr eleasetheb
utton,g
reens tatuslights tartsb
linking)
Holdfora
pproximately2 0s econdsforfactoryr eset( Note:T heL EDs tatuslightb
linksinR
ED
3timesa
ndr eleasetheb
utton,a
llW
AN/LANp ortlightss tartb
linking)
AftertheP
epwaver outerfinishesr ebooting,thefactoryd
efaults ettingsw
illb
er estored.
ImportantN
ote
Allp
reviousc onfigurationsa ndb
andwidthu saged ataw illb
elosta
fterr estoringfactory
defaults ettings.R
egularb
ackupo fc onfigurations ettingsiss tronglyr ecommended.
AppendixB:FusionSIMManual
Peplinkh asd
evelopeda u
niquetechnologyc alledF usionSIM,w hicha llowsS IMc ardsto
remotelylinktoa c ellularr outer.T hisc anb
ed onev iac loudo rw
ithinthes amep hysical
network.T herea rea fewk eys cenariostofitc ertaina pplications.
Thep urposeo fthism anualistop rovidea nintroductiono nw
heretos tarta ndh owtos etu
p
forthem ostc ommons cenariosa ndu ses.
Requirements
1. AC
ellularr outerthats upportsF
usionSIMtechnology
2. SIMInjector
3. SIMc ard
Notes:
- Alwaysc heckforthelatestF irmwarev ersionforb oththec ellularr outera
ndtheS
IM
Injector.Y ouc ana lsoc heckforthelatestF
irmwarev ersiono nthed
evice’sW
EB
configurationp age.
- Alisto
fp
roductsthats upportF usionSIMc anb efoundo ntheS IMInjectorW
EBp age.
Pleasec hecku nderthes ectionS upportedm odels.
SIMInjectorr eseta etails
ndlogind
Howtor eseta S
IMInjector:
- Holdther esetb uttonfor5 -10s econds.O ncetheL EDs tatuslightturnsR ED,ther eset
buttonc anb er eleased.S IMInjectorw illr eboota
nds tartw iththefactoryd efault
settings.
Thed
efaultW EBlogins ettings:
- User:a dmin
- Password:a dmin
- IPa ddress:thed eviceo nlyh asa D
HCPc lienta ndn ofallbackIPa ddress.T herefore,
itisa
dvisedtoc hecke verytimew hatIPa ddressisa ssignedtotheS IMInjector.
Notes:
- TheS IMInjectorc anb em onitoredv iaInControl2 .C
onfigurationisn ots upported.
Scenario1
:S
IMInjectorinL
ANo
fC
ellularR
outer
Setupt opology
Thisisthem ostb
asics cenarioinw hichtheS IMInjectorisc onnectedd irectlytothec ellular
router’sL ANp ortv iaa
ne thernetc able.T hisa
llowsforthec ellularr outertob ep ositionedfor
theb estp ossibles ignal.M eanwhile,theS IMc ardsc anb ec onvenientlylocatedino ther
locationss ucha stheo ffice,p
assengera rea,o rtheb ridgeo fa s hip.T heS IMInjectora llows
fore
asilys wappingS IMc ardsw ithoutn eedingtoa ccessa c ellularr outer.
IMPORTANT:C ellularW ANw illn
otfallbacktothelocalS IMifitisc onfiguredtou setheS IM
Injector.
Configuringt heSIMInjector
1.C onnecttheS IMInjectortotheL ANp orto
fthec ellularr outer.
2.InsertS IMc ardsintotheS IMInjector.T heS IMc ardsw illb
ea
utomaticallyd etected.
IMPORTANT:S IMc ardsinsertedintoS IMInjectorm ustn oth avea P
INc ode.
Note1 :T
heS IMInjectorg etsitsIPa
ddressv iaD HCPa ndd oesn'th avea s taticIPa
ddress.
Tofindit’sa ddress,p leasec hecktheD HCPleaseo nthec ellularr outer.
Configuringt heC
ellularR
outer
Step1
.E
nabletheS
IMInjectorc ommunicationp
rotocol.
1a.Ify oua
reu
singa B
alancec ellularr outer,g ototheN
etworktab( topn
avigationb ar).
1b.Ify oua
reu
singa M
AXc ellularr outer,g ototheA dvancedtab( topn
avigationb ar).
2.U nderM isc.s ettings( leftn
avigationb ar)findR emoteS IMM anagement.
3.InR
emoteS IMM anagement,c licko nthee exttoR
diticonn emoteS IMisD
isabled.
hecktheA
4.C utoL
ANd
iscoveryc heckboxa
ndc lickS
avea
ndA
pplyC
hanges.
lickS
5.C avea
ndthenA
pplyC
hanges.
Step2
.E
nableR
emoteSIMforthes electedC
ellularinterface.
otoN
1.G etwork( topn
avigationb ar),thenW
AN( leftn
avigationb ndc lickD
ar)a etailsfora
selectedc ellularW
AN.T hisw
illo
pentheW ANC onnectionS ettingspage.
2.S owntoC
crolld ellulars ettings.
3.IntheS
IMC
ards ection,s electU
seR
emoteS
IMO
nly.
nterc onfigurations ettingsinR
4.E emoteS IMS ettingss ection.C licko nS
cann earby
remoteS IMs ervertos howthes erialn umber(s)o fthec onnectedS IMInjector(s).A vailable
configurationo ptionsforc ellularinterfacea res hownb elow:
A. DefiningS IMInjector(s)
-F ormat:< S/N>
-E xample1 :1
111-2222-3333
-E xample2 :1
111-2222-33334 444-5555-6666
B. DefiningS IMInjector(s)S IMs lot(s):
-F ormat:< S/N:slotn umber>
-E xample1 :1
111-2222-3333:7,5( theC ellularInterfacew illu
seS IMins lot7
,then5 )
-E xample2 :1
111-2222-3333:1,21 111-2222-3333:3,4( thec ellularInterfacew illu se
SIMins lot1 ,thenin2
fromthefirstS IMInjector,a ndthenitw
illu
se3
a
nd4 fromthe
secondS IMInjector).
Note:Itisr ecommendedtou sed
ifferentS
IMs lotsfore
achc ellularinterface.
lickS
5.C avea ndA
pplyC
hanges.
Step3
.( Optional)C
ustomS
IMc ardss ettings.
1a.F ora
B alancer outer,g ototheN etwork( Toptab).
1b.F ora
M AXr outer,g ototheA dvanced( Toptab).
nderM
2.U isc.s ettings( Left-sidetab)findR emoteS IMM anagement.
3.C
licko ntheA
ddR emoteS IMb utton,fillina
llther equiredinfoa ndc lickS
ave.T hiss ection
allowsd efiningc ustomr equirementsfora S
IMc ardlocatedina c ertainS IMs lot:
- Enable/Disabler oaming( byd efaultr oamingisd isabled).
- AddC ustomm obileo perators ettings( APN,u sern ame,p
assword).
4.R
epeatc onfigurationfora llS
IMc ardsw hichn eedc ustoms ettings.
lickA
5.C pplyC hangestotakee ffect.
Scenario2 :S
IMInjectorinW ANo
fm
ainR
outera
nd
multipleC
ellularR outers
Setupt opology
Additionalc
onfigurationsf orC
ellularR
outers
Step1
.D
isabletheD
HCPs erver.
- HDD
ome1 s houlda
cta sa D
HCPs erver.
- HDD
ome2 s houldb
ec onfiguredtoh avea s taticIPa
ddressw
ithD
HCPd isabled.
- Bothr outerss houldb einthes ames ubnet( e.g.1 92.168.50.1a nd1 92.168.50.2).
1.G otoN etwork( Toptab),thenN etworkS ettings( Left-sidetab),a nU
ndc licko ntagged
LAN.T hisw
illo
penu ptheL
ANs ettingsp
age.
2.C hangetheIPa ddressto1 92.168.50.2.
3.IntheD HCPS ervers ection,u
ncheckthec heckboxtod isableD
HCPS erver.
4.C lickS avea ndA pplyC hanges.
Step2
.E
thernetp
ortc onfiguration
TheE
thernetp ortm
ustb es ettoA
CCESSm odefore achH DD ome.T od othis,d ummy
VLANsn eedtob ec reatedfirst.
1. GotoN etwork( Toptab),thenN etworkS ettings( Left-sidetab),andc licko nN
ew
LAN.T
hisw illo
penthes ettingsp
agetoc reatea
d
ummyV LAN.
2. Theimageb elows howsthev aluesthatn eedtob ec hangedtoc reatea n
ewV LAN:
Note:s etd
ifferentIPa ddressesfore achH Dd ome( e.g.1
92.168.10.1a nd1
92.168.10.2).
3. ClickS avea ndA pplyC hanges.
4. GotoN etwork( Toptab),thenP
ortS ettings( Left-sidetab).
5. SettheP ypetoA
ortT ccessa LANtoU
nds etV ntaggedL AN( seep
ictureb
elow).
6. ClickS
avea
ndA
pplyC
hanges.
Scenario3 :S
IMInjectorinL ANo
fm
ainR
outera
nd
multipleC
ellularR outers
Setupt opology
Inthiss cenario,S IMsa rep rovidedtotheH DD omesv iathem ainr outer.Inthise
xample,the
RemoteS IMP roxyfunctionalityn eedstob ee nabledo nthem ainr outer.
Notes:
- HDD omec anb er eplacedw itha nyo therc ellularr outerthats upportsR emoteSIM.
- Itisr ecommendedtou seP
eplinkB alances erieso
rX
s eriesr outersa
sthem
ain
router.
Thiss cenarior equirest hec ompletiono ft hec
onfigurations tepsf ort hec
ellularr outer
andt heS IMInjectora
sinS
cenario1 .T
hec onfigurationf ort hem ainr outerise xplained
below.
MainR
outerc
onfiguration
IMPORTANT:M ainr outerL
ANs idea ndC
ellularR outersm ustb
ec onfiguredu singd
ifferent
subnets,e 92.168.50.1/24a
.g.1 92.168.100.1/24.
nd1
Note:p
leasem akes uretheP eplinkr outerisr unningF irmware8 .1.0o ra
bove.
1.O
penthem ainr outerW EBinterfacea ndc hange:
From< IPa ddress>/cgi-bin/MANGA/index.cgito< ddress>/cgi-bin/MANGA/support.cgi.
IPa
Thisw
illo
penthes upport.cgip age.
2.S
crolld owntofindR emoteS IMP roxya n[ clickt oc
ndc licko onfigure]thatislocated
nexttoit.
hecktheE
3.C nablec heckbox.
4.C
licko nS ave.
5.G
ob acktotheindex.cgip agea nA
ndc licko pplyC hanges.
Scenario4
:S
IMInjectorina
r emotelocation
Setupt opology
Requirementsforinstallinga
S
IMInjectorina
r emotelocation:
● Cellularr outerc ommunicatesw iththeS IMInjectorv iaU DPp ort5
0000.T herefore
thisp
ortm
ustb er eachablev iap ublicIPo vertheInternet.
● Theo new aylatencyb etweenthec ellularr outera ndtheS IMInjectors houldb eu
pt o
250m s.A h
igherlatencym ayleadtos tabilityissues.
● Thec ellularr outerm usth aveInternetc onnectiontoc onnecttotheS IMInjector.It
canb ea
notherInternetc onnectionv iaE therneto rF
iberifp
ossible,o ra
s econdary
cellularinterfacew itha localS IM( IgniteS IM).
● Duetoitsh ighlatency,itisn otr ecommendedtou ses atelliteW ANforc onnectingto
aS
IMInjectorinr emotelocations.
SIMInjectorc
onfigurationist hes
amea
sinS
cenario1
.
CellularR
outerc
onfiguration
Step1.E
nabletheS
IMInjectorc ommunicationp
rotocol.
1a.F
ora alancec ellularr outer,gototheN
B etwork( Toptab).
1b.F
ora
M ototheA
AXc ellularr outer,g dvanced( Toptab).
2.U nderM isc.s
ettings( Left-sidetab),findR emoteS IMM anagement.
3.InR
emoteS IMM anagement,c licko nthee exttoR
diticonn emoteS IMisD
isabled.
4.E
nterthep
ublicIPo
ftheS
IMInjectora ndc lickS avea
ndA pplyC
hanges.
Notes:
- DoN
OTc
heckA utoL AND
iscovery.
- DoN
OTa
dda
S
IMInjectors
erialn
umbert ot heR
emoteS
IMH
ostf ield.
Step2
.R
emoteSIMa ndc ustomS
IMc ards ettingsc onfigurationsa
rethes amea
sinS
cenario
1.
Howt oc
heckifa
P
epwaveC
ellularR
outers
upports
RemoteS IM
1.G otoN etwork( Toptab),thenW AN( Left-sidetab),a
ndc lickD etailso
na nyc ellularW
AN.
Thisw illo
pentheW ANC onnectionS ettingsp
age.
2.S crolld owntoC ellulars
ettings.
Ify ouc ans eetheR emoteS IMS
ettingss ection,thenthec ellularr outers upportsR emote
SIMs.
Monitort hes
tatuso
ft heR
emoteS
IM
otoN
1.G etwork( Toptab),thenW AN( Left-sidetab),a ndc lickD
etailso nthec ellularW AN
whichw asc onfiguredtou seR emoteSIM.
hecktheW
2.C ANC onnectionS tatuss ection.W
ithinthec ellW
ANd etails,thereisa s ection
forR
emoteS IM( SIMc ardIMSI,S
IMInjectors erialn
umbera ndS IMs lot).
AppendixC:OverviewofportsusedbyPeplink
SD-WANr outersandotherPeplinkservices
DefaultP
ort
Default
Number Usage Service Inbound/Outbound Status
UDP5
246 Dataflow InControl Outbound Enabled
TCP4
43 HTTPSs ervice InControl Outbound Enabled
Optional,u sedw henT
CP
TCP5
246 443isn
otr esponding InControl Outbound Enabled
InControlV
irtual
TCP5
246 RemoteW
ebA
dmin Appliance Outbound Enabled
PepVPN/
TCP4
500 VPND
ata( TCPM
ode) Inbound/O
utbound* Disabled
SpeedFusion
PepVPN/
TCP3
2015 VPNh
andshake Inbound/O
utbound* Disabled
SpeedFusion
PepVPN/
UDP4
500 VPND
ata Inbound/O
utbound* Disabled
SpeedFusion
PepVPN/
2015º
UDP3 VPND
ata( alternative) Inbound/O
utbound* Disabled
SpeedFusion
TCP/UDP
PepVPN/
VPNS
ub-TunnelsD
ata Inbound/O
utbound* Disabled
4500+N-1^ SpeedFusion
VPNS ub-TunnelsD
ata
PepVPN/
UDP3
2015+N-1^ Inbound/O
utbound* Disabled
(alternative) SpeedFusion
UDP4
500 VPND
ata IPsec Inbound/O
utbound* Disabled
UDP5
00 VPNinitiation IPsec Inbound/O
utbound* Disabled
RemoteU ser
UDP5
00 L2TP Access Inbound Disabled
RemoteU ser
UDP1
701 L2TP Access Inbound Disabled
RemoteU ser
UDP4
500 L2TP Access Inbound Disabled
RemoteU ser
UDP1
194 OpenVPN Access Inbound Disabled
RemoteU ser
IP4
7 PPTP( GRE) Access Inbound Disabled
Peplink
RemoteA ssistanceD
irect
Troubleshooting
TCP2
222 connection Assistance Outbound Enabled
TCP8
0 HTTPtraffic WebA
dmin
Inbound Enabled
Interfacea
ccess
WebA dmin
Interfacea ccess
TCP4
43 HTTPStraffic (secure) Inbound Enabled
TCP8
822 SSH SSH Inbound Disabled
UDP1
61 SNMPG
et SNMPm
onitoring Inbound Disabled
UDP1
62 SNMPT
rap SNMPm
onitoring Outbound Disabled
TCP,U
DP1
812 RadiusA
uthentication Radius Outbound Disabled
TCP,U
DP1
813 RadiusA
ccounting Radius Outbound Disabled
Inbound Disabled
UDP1
23 NetworkT
imeP
rotocol NTP Outbound Enabled
Real-timelocationd
atain
TCP6
0660 NMEAformat GPS Outbound Disabled
Disclaimer:
● Byd efault,o
nlyT CP3 2015a ndU DP4 500a ren
eededforP epVPN/S peedFusion.
● Inbound/O utbound*- Inbound= F
orS
erverm ode;O utbound= F
orC
lientm ode
● UDP3 2015º- IfIPsecV PNo rL
2TP/IPsecR UAise nabled,theU DP4 500iso ccupied,s o
PepVPN/S peedFusionw illa
utomaticallys witchtoU PD3 2015a sV
PNd atap
ort.
● UDP3 2015+N-1^/T CP/UDP4 500+N-1^- W henu singS ub-Tunnels,m ultiplep ortsa reinu
se
(1fore achS
ub-Tunnelp rofile).
● Thed efaultU
DPd atap ortsu sedw henu sing( Nn umbero fS
ub-Tunnelp rofiles)a re:
4500…4500+N-1,o r( whenp ort4 500isinu
seb yIPseco rL
2TP/IPsec)3 2015…3 2015+N-1".
AppendixD:Declaration
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXB
R1M
ini
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to
part
15
of
the
FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to
provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interferencea th
iso wne
xpense.
FCC Caution Any changes or modifications not
expressly approved by
the
party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. IEEE 802.11b or
802.11go perationo fthisp
roductintheU .S.A.isfirmware-limitedtoc hannels1 through1 1.
FCCR
adiationE
xposureS
tatement( forM
AXB
R1m
ini)
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be
installed
and
operated with minimum distance
20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb
ody.
This
transmitter
must
not
be
co-located
or
operating
in
conjunction
with
any
other
antenna
or
transmitter.
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXB
R1M
inif orE
C25-E)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
6.38d
Bm
WWAN: R efer3
GPPT S3
6.521- 1( U EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of
20cmb etweenther adiator&
y ourb
ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXB
R1M
inif orM
C7455)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
6.38d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of
20cmb etweenther adiator&
y ourb
ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( forM
AXB
R1M
ini)
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to
the
following
two
conditions (1)
this
device
may
not
cause interference,
and (2)
this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operationo fthed evice.
Le
present appareil est
conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio
exempts de
licence.
L'exploitation
est autorisee aux
deux conditions
suivantes (1)
l'appareil
ne
doit
pas produire
de
brouillage,
et
(2)
l'utilisateur
de
l'appareil
doit
accepter
tout
brouillage
radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Innovation,
Sciencese tD
éveloppementé conomiqueC anada.
This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
Cet équipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED définies pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé à une distance
minimumd e2
0c me
ntreler adiateure
tv otrec orps.
FCC& ICR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tatesa
ndC
anada( forM
AXB
R1
Mini)
FCCID: U
8G-P1930LITER6
FCC
15.21:
The
changes or
modifications not expressly
approved
by the
party
responsible
for
compliancec ouldv oidtheu
ser'sa
uthoritytoo
peratethee
quipment.
RF exposure warning: This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with
provided instructions and
the antenna(s) used for
this transmitter
must
be installed to
provide
a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or
operating in
conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
End-users and installers must
be provide with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for
satisfyingR Fe xposurec ompliance.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to
part
15
of
the
FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to
provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interferencea th
iso wne
xpense.
ICW
arning:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation,
Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject
tothefollowingtwoc onditions
1. Thisd evicem ayn
otc auseinterference.
2. This d
evice must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesiredo perationo fthed
evice.
Le
present
appareil
est conforme
aux
CNR
d'Industrie
Canada
applicables
aux
appareils
radio
exemptsd elicence.
L'exploitatione
sta
utoriseea
uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes
1. l'appareiln ed oitp asp
roduired eb
rouillage,e t
2. l'utilisateur de
l'appareil
doit
accepter tout
brouillage
radioelect
rique
subi,
meme
si
le
brouillagee sts usceptibled 'enc ompromettrelefonctionnement.
Informationsc oncernantl'expositiona
uxfrequencesr adio( RF)
Cet equipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations IC definies pour un
environnementn oncontrole.
Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise a une distance minimum de 20 cm entre le
radiateuretv otrec orps.
Cet emetteur
ne
doit
pas
etre
co-localisees
ou
operant
en
conjonction
avec
une
autreantenne
outransmetteur.
Les utilisateurs finaux et les installateurs doivent etre
informes
des
instructions
d'installation
de l'antenne et des conditions de fonctionnement de l'emetteur afin de satisfaire a la
conformited 'expositionR F.
This
radio
transmitter
IC
20682-P1930LITER6 has been approved by Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below, with the
maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not
included in
this
list
that
have a gain
greater than the
maximum gain
indicated
for
any type listed are
strictly prohibited for
use with
thisd
evice.
Le present emetteur radio 20682-P1930LITER6 a ete approuve par Innovation, Sciences et
Developpement economique Canada pour fonctionner avec les
types d'antenne enumeres ci
dessous et
ayant un
gain
admissible maximal. Les
types d'antenne non inclus
dans cette liste,
et
dont
le
gain
est
superieur au
gain
maximal indique
pour tout
type
figurant sur
la
liste,
sont
strictementinterditsp ourl'exploitationd el'emetteur.
antennatypeO
mni-directional
antennag
ain5
.33
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXB
R1M
K2
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to
part
15
of
the
FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to
provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interferencea th
iso wne
xpense.
Any
changes or
modifications
not
expressly approved
by the
party
responsible
for
compliance
couldv oidtheu
ser'sa
uthoritytoo
peratethise
quipment.
RadiationE
xposureS
tatement
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be
installed
and
operated with minimum distance
24cm
betweenther adiator& ody.
y ourb
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( ForM
AXB
R1M
K2)
This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and
Economic
Development
Canada
technicals pecifications.
Le présent produit est conforme a
ux spécifications techniques applicables d'Innovation,
Sciencese tD
éveloppementé conomiqueC anada.
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation,
Science and Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject
tothefollowingtwoc onditions:
(1)T
hisd
evicem
ayn
otc auseinterference.
(2)
This
device must
accept
any
interference,
including
interference
that
may
cause
undesired
operationo fthed evice.
Le
present
appareil
est
conforme
aux
CNR
d'Industrie
Canada
applicables
aux
appareils
radio
exemptsd
elicence.L
'exploitatione
sta
utoriseea
uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes:
(1) l’appareiln
ed
oitp
asp
roduired
eb
rouillage,e
t
(2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le
brouillagee sts usceptibled ’en
(i) The device
for
operation
in
the
band
5150–5250
MHz is
only
for
indoor
use
to
reduce
the
potentialforh armfulinterferencetoc o-channelm
obiles atellites ystems;
(ii)
For devices with
detachable
antenna(s), the
maximum antenna gain permitted for devices
in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the
e.i.r.p.
limitss pecifiedforp oint-to-pointa
ndn on-point-to-pointo perationa sa ppropriate;a nd
The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the band
5725-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN
devices.
(i)
Le
dispositif fonctionnant dans
la
bande 5150-5250 MHz
est
réservé
uniquement pour
une
utilisation à l’intérieur afin
de
réduire les
risques
de
brouillage
préjudiciable
aux
systèmes de
satellitesm obilesu tilisantlesm êmesc anaux;
(ii)
Le
gain maximal d’antenne permis pour les
dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s)
utilisant
la
bande 5725-5850 MHz doit
se
conformer à la
limitation
P.I.R.E
spécifiée
pour
l’exploitation
pointà p
ointe
tn
onp
ointà
p oint,s elonlec as.
En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi être a
visés que les utilisateurs de radars de
haute
puissance sont désignés utilisateurs principaux (c.-à-d., qu’ils ont la
priorité)
pour
les
bande
5725-5850 MHz et que
ces radars
pourraient causer du
brouillage et/ou
des
dommages aux
dispositifsL AN-EL.
RadiationExposureS
tatement
This device complies with the ISED radiation exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This device should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
Cet équipement est conforme avec l'exposition aux radiations ISED définies pour un
environnement non contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé à une distance
minimumd e2
0c me
ntreler adiateure
tv otrec orps.
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXB
R1M
K2)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.95d
Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M
Hz) : 2
2.73d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of
20cmb etweenther adiator&
y ourb
ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXB
R1C
lassic
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to
part
15
of
the
FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to
provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interferencea th
iso wne
xpense.
Caution Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliancec ouldv oidtheu ser'sa
uthoritytoo peratethise
quipment.
FCCR
adiationE
xposureS
tatement( forM
AXB
R1C
lassic)
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCr adiatione xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hise
quipments houldb einstalleda
ndo
peratedw ithm inimumd istance2
0cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( f orM
AXB
R1C
lassic)
Thisd
evicec ompliesw ithIndustryC anada'slicence-exemptR SSs.O
perationiss ubjecttothe
followingtwoc onditions( 1)T
hisd
evicem
ayn
otc auseinterference;a nd(2)T
hisd
evicem ust
accepta nyinterference,includinginterferencethatm ayc auseu ndesiredo
perationo fthe
device.
Lep
resenta ppareile
stc onformea uxC NRd 'IndustrieC anadaa pplicablesa uxa ppareilsr adio
exemptsd elicence.L
'exploitatione sta utoriseea uxd euxc onditionss uivantes( 1)l'appareiln e
doitp
asp
roduired eb
rouillage,e t( 2)l'utilisateurd el'appareild oita
cceptertoutb
rouillage
radioelectriques ubi,m emes ileb
rouillagee stsusceptibled 'enc ompromettrele
fonctionnement.
Thisd
evicec ompliesw iththeISEDr adiatione xposurelimits etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hisd
evices houldb einstalleda
ndo
peratedw ithm inimumd istance2
0cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb
ody.
Ceté
quipemente stc onformea vecl'expositiona uxr adiationsISEDd éfiniesp ouru n
environnementn onc ontrôlé.C eté
quipementd oitê
treinstallée
tu
tiliséà u
ned istance
minimumd e2
0c me ntreler adiateure tv otrec orps.
Thisp
roductm eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anada
technicals pecifications.
Lep
résentp
roduite
stc onformea uxs pécificationstechniquesa
pplicablesd'Innovation,
Sciencese tD
éveloppementé conomiqueC anada.
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXB
R1C
lassicf orM
C7455)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.78d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance
of
20cmb etweenther adiator&
y ourb
ody.
ontacta
c s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXB
R1C
lassicf orE
C25-E)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.78d
Bm
WWAN: R efer3
GPPT S3
6.521- 1( U EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of
20cmb etweenther adiator&
y ourb
ody.
ontacta
c s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC ommission( FCC)C omplianceN otice:
ForM
AXH
D4M
BX,M
AXH
D2M
BX
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to
part
15
of
the
FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to
provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interferencea th
iso wne
xpense.
IMPORTANTN
OTE
FCCR
adiationE
xposureS
tatement
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCr adiatione xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hise
quipments houldb einstalleda
ndo
peratedw ithm inimumd istance2
0cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
AnyC
hangeso rm
odificationsn ote
xpresslya
pprovedb
ythep
artyr esponsibleforc ompliance
couldv oidtheu
ser'sa
uthoritytoo
peratethee
quipment.
ISEDW
arningS
tatementF
orM
AXH
D4M
BX
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement
Thisd evicec ompliesw ithIndustryC
anada'slicence-exemptR SSs.O perationiss ubjecttothefollowing
twoc onditions( 1)T
hisd
evicem ayn otc auseinterference;a
nd(2)T hisd
evicem usta
ccepta ny
interference,includinginterferencethatm ayc auseu
ndesiredo perationo fthed
evice.
Lep resenta ppareile stc onformea uxC
NRd 'IndustrieC
anadaa pplicablesa uxa
ppareilsr adioe xempts
delicence.L 'exploitatione sta
utoriseea uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes( 1)l'appareiln ed
oitp
asproduire
deb rouillage,e t( 2)l'utilisateurd el'appareild oita
cceptertoutb
rouillager adioelectriques ubi,m emes i
leb
rouillagee sts usceptibled 'enc ompromettrelefonctionnement.
Thisp
roductm
eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anadatechnical
specifications.
Lep
résentp
roduite
stc onformea
uxs pécificationstechniquesa
pplicablesd
'Innovation,S
ciencese
t
Développementé conomiqueC anada.
(i)T
hed
eviceforo
perationintheb
and5
150–5250M Hziso nlyforindooru
setor educethep
otential
forh armfulinterferencetoc o-channelm obiles atellites ystems;
(ii)F
ord
evicesw
ithd
etachableantenna(s),them aximuma ntennag ainp ermittedford evicesinthe
band5 725-5850M Hzs hallb
es uchthatthee
quipments tillc ompliesw iththee
.i.r.p.limitss pecifiedfor
point-to-pointa ndn on-point-to-pointo perationa sa
ppropriate;a nd
Theh igh-powerr adarsa rea
llocateda sp
rimaryu
sers( i.e.p
riorityu
sers)o
ftheb
and5 725-5850M
Hz
andthattheser adarsc ouldc auseinterferencea nd/ord amagetoL E-LANd evices.
(i)L
ed
ispositiffonctionnantd anslab
ande5 150-5250M Hze
str éservéu niquementp ouru neu
tilisation
àl’intérieura
find er éduirelesr isquesd eb
rouillagep
réjudiciablea uxs ystèmesd es atellitesm
obiles
utilisantlesm
êmesc anaux;
(ii)Leg
ainm aximald ’antennep ermisp ourlesd
ispositifsa veca
ntenne(s)a movible(s)u tilisantlab ande
5725-5850M Hzd oits ec onformerà
lalimitationP .I.R.Es pécifiéep ourl’exploitationp
ointà p
ointe
tn
on
pointà p
oint,s elonlec as.
Eno
utre,lesu
tilisateursd
evraienta ussiê trea
visésq uelesu tilisateursd er adarsd
eh
autep
uissance
sontd ésignésu tilisateursp
rincipaux( c.-à-d.,q
u’ilso
ntlap
riorité)p ourlesb ande5 725-5850M Hze
t
quec esr adarsp ourraientc auserd
ub
rouillagee t/oud esd ommagesa uxd ispositifsL
AN-EL.
ICR
adiationE
xposureS
tatement
Thise quipmentc ompliesw ithInnovation,S ciencea ndE conomicD evelopmentC anadaR Fe
xposure
limitss etforthfora
nu ncontrollede nvironment.T hise quipments houldb einstalleda
ndo
peratedto
ensurea m
inimumo f2
0c ms pacingtoa
nyp
ersona ta
lltimes.
Declarationd 'expositiona uxr adiationsC ete
quipemente stc onformea uxlimitesd 'expositiona ux
rayonnementsICe tabliesp
ouru ne
nvironnementn onc ontrole.C etequipementd oite treinstallee
t
utilisea
vecu
nm
inimumd e2
0c md ed
istancee ntrelas ourced er ayonnemente tv otrec orps.
Thisr adiotransmitter2 0682-P1MBXh asb
eena pprovedb yInnovation,S ciencea ndE
conomic
DevelopmentC anadatoo peratew iththea ntennatypeslistedb elow,w iththem aximump ermissible
gainindicated.A ntennatypesn otincludedinthislistthath
avea g
aing reaterthanthem aximumg ain
indicatedfora nytypelisteda
res trictlyp
rohibitedforu sew
iththisd evice.
WIFIA
ntennatypeR
eplacementA
ntenna
WIFIA
ntennag
ain2
.4GHz/2
.44d
Bi,5
GH/4
.73d
Bi
LTEA
ntennatypeR
eplacementA
ntenna
LTEA
ntennag
ain4
.38d
Bi
BatteryC
autionS
tatement ( MAXH
D4M
BX)
Risko
fe
xplosioniftheb
atteryisr eplacedb
ya
nincorrecttype.
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXH
D4M
BXF
orE
M7565)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.6d
Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M
Hz) : 1
9.4d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of
20cmb etweenther adiator&
y ourb
ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXH
D2M
BX/M
AXH
D4M
BXF
orL
M960A18)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.6d
Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M
Hz) : 1
9.4d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of
20cmb etweenther adiator&
y ourb
ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXH
D2
Thise quipmenth asb eentesteda ndfoundtoc omplyw iththelimitsfora C
lassA d
igitald
evice,
pursuanttop art1 5o
ftheF CCR ules.T heselimitsa redesignedtop rovider easonablep rotection
againsth armfulinterferencew henthee quipmentiso peratedina c ommerciale nvironment.T his
equipmentg enerates,u ses,a
ndc anr adiater adiofrequencye nergya nd,ifn
otinstalleda ndu sedin
accordancew iththeinstructionm anual,m ayc auseh armfulinterferencetor adioc ommunications.
Operationo fthise quipmentina r esidentiala
reaislikelytoc auseh armfulinterferenceinw hichc ase
theu
serw
illb
er equiredtoc orrecttheinterferencea th
iso
wne xpense.
Anyc hangeso rm
odificationsn ote
xpresslya
pprovedb ythep
artyr esponsibleforc ompliancec ould
voidtheu
ser'sa
uthoritytoo
peratethise
quipment.
RadiationExposureStatement
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCR Fr adiatione xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hise
quipments houldb einstalleda ndo
peratedw itha m
inimumd istanceo
f5
0
centimetersb
etweenther adiatora
ndy ourb ody.
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( MAXH
D2)
Thisp
roductm
eetstheapplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anadatechnical
specifications.
Lep
résentp
roduite
stc onformea
uxs pécificationstechniquesa
pplicablesd
'Innovation,S
ciencese
t
Développementé conomiqueC anada.
Thisd
evicec ontainslicence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s)thatc omplyw
ithInnovation,S ciencea nd
EconomicD evelopmentC anada’slicence-exemptR
SS(s).O
perationiss ubjecttothefollowingtwo
conditions:
(1)T
hisd
evicem
ayn
otc auseinterference.
(2)T
hisd
evicem usta
ccepta
nyinterference,includinginterferencethatm
ayc auseu
ndesired
operationo fthed
evice.
Lep resenta
ppareile
stc onformea uxC
NRd 'IndustrieC
anadaa pplicablesa
uxa
ppareilsr adioe
xempts
delicence.L
'exploitatione sta
utoriseea uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes:
(1)l’appareiln
ed
oitp
asp
roduired
eb
rouillage,e
t
(2)l’utilisateurd el’appareild
oita
cceptertoutb
rouillager adioelectriques ubi,m
emes ileb
rouillagee
st
susceptibled ’en
(i)T
hed
eviceforo
perationintheb
and5
150–5250M Hziso nlyforindooru
setor educethep
otential
forh armfulinterferencetoc o-channelm obiles atellites ystems;
(ii)F
ord
evicesw
ithd
etachablea ntenna(s),them aximuma ntennag ainp ermittedford evicesinthe
band5 725-5850M Hzs hallb
esuchthatthee
quipments tillc ompliesw iththee
.i.r.p.limitss pecifiedfor
point-to-pointa ndn on-point-to-pointo perationa sa
ppropriate;a nd
Theh igh-powerr adarsa rea
llocateda sp
rimaryu
sers( i.e.p
riorityu
sers)o
ftheb
and5 725-5850M
Hz
andthattheser adarsc ouldc auseinterferencea nd/ord amagetoL E-LANd evices.
(i)L
ed
ispositiffonctionnantd anslab
ande5 150-5250M Hze
str éservéu niquementp ouru neu
tilisation
àl’intérieura
find er éduirelesr isquesd eb
rouillagep
réjudiciablea uxs ystèmesd es atellitesm
obiles
utilisantlesm
êmesc anaux;
(ii)L
eg
ainm aximald ’antennep ermisp ourlesd
ispositifsa veca
ntenne(s)a movible(s)u tilisantlab ande
5725-5850MHzd oits ec onformerà
lalimitationP .I.R.Es pécifiéep ourl’exploitationp
ointà p
ointe
tn
on
pointà p
oint,s elonlec as.
Eno
utre,lesu
tilisateursd
evraienta ussiê trea
visésq uelesu tilisateursd er adarsd
eh
autep
uissance
sontd ésignésu tilisateursp
rincipaux( c.-à-d.,q
u’ilso
ntlap
riorité)p ourlesb ande5 725-5850M Hze
t
quec esr adarsp ourraientc auserd
ub
rouillagee t/oud esd ommagesa uxd ispositifsL
AN-EL.
RadiationE
xposureS
tatement
Thisd
evicec ompliesw iththeISEDr adiatione xposurelimits etforthfora
nu
ncontrollede nvironment.
Thisd
evices houldb einstalleda ndo
peratedw ithm
inimumd istance3 7cmb etweentheradiator& y our
body.7 0c mm inimumd istanceforthed eviceo
peratew ithp
lug-inU SBc ellulard evicew
hichh as
maximumo f7
W(ERP)o utputp
ower.
Ceté quipemente stc onformea vecl'expositiona uxr adiationsISEDd éfiniesp ouru ne nvironnement
nonc ontrôlé.C eté quipementd oitê
treinstallée
tu
tiliséà u
ned istancem inimumd e3 7c me
ntrele
radiateure tv otrec orps.D istancem inimaled e7
0c mp ourq uel'appareilfonctionnea vecu na
ppareil
cellulaireU
SBe nfichableq uia
u
nep uissanced es ortiem aximaled e7 W
( ERP).
BatteryC
autionS
tatement
Risko
fe
xplosioniftheb
atteryisr eplacedb
ya
nincorrecttype.
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXH
D2F
orM
C7455)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.90d
Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M
Hz) : 2
2.88d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This
equipment should be installed and
operated with a
minimumd istanceo f2
0cmb etweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXH
D2F
orM
C7565)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.86d
Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M
Hz) : 2
2.68d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of
20cmb etweenther adiator&
y ourb
ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
(F
orM
AXB
R1C
lassicC
BIEC6
2368-1)
Mountingt heU
nit
WallM
ount
TheP
epwaveM
AXBR1C
lassicr equiresfours crewsforw
allm
ounting.
Ensuretoc onnectthep
owerc ordo
fp
owera
daptertoa
s ocket-outletw
ithe
arthing
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXB
R1P
ro5
G
FCC1
5.21
RFe
xposurew
arning
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( M
AXB
R1P
ro5
G)
1.T
hisd
evicem
ayn
otc auseinterference.
2.T
hisd
evicem usta
ccepta nyinterference,includinginterferencethatm
ayc auseu
ndesired
operationo fthed
evice.
Lep
resenta
ppareile
stc onformea
uxC NRd 'IndustrieC anadaa pplicablesa uxa ppareilsr adio
exemptsd elicence.L
'exploitatione
sta
utoriseea uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes
1.l'appareiln
ed
oitp
asp
roduired
eb
rouillage,e
t
2.l'utilisateurd
el'appareild
oita
cceptertoutb
rouillager adioelectriques ubi,m
emes ile
brouillagee sts usceptibled
'en
compromettrelefonctionnement.Informationsc oncernantl'expositiona
uxfrequencesr adio
(RF)
Cete
quipemente
stc onformea
vecl'expositiona
uxr adiationsICd
efiniesp
ouru
n
environnementn
oncontrole.
Cete
quipementd oite treinstallee
tu
tilisea
u
ned
istancem
inimumd
e2
3c me
ntrele
radiateuretv otrec orps.
Cete metteurn
ed
oitp
ase
trec o-localiseeso
uo
perante
nc onjonctiona
vecu
nea
utreantenne
outransmetteur.
conditionsd
efonctionnementd
el'emetteura
find
es atisfairea
lac onformited
'expositionR
F.
antennatypeO
mni-directional
antennag
ainfor2
.4GHz2
.44d
Bi
antennag
ainfor5
GHz( 5
150~
5
250M
Hz) 4
.10d
Bi
antennag
ainfor5
GHz( 5
725~
5
850M
Hz) 4
.73d
Bi
BatteryC
autionS
tatement
Risko
fe
xplosioniftheb
atteryisr eplacedb nincorrecttype.
ya
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXB
R1P
ro5
G)
2.4GHz( 2
412–
2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.74d
Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M
Hz) : 2
2.66d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This
equipment complies with
CE radiation exposure limits
set
forth
for
an
uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum
distanceo
f2
0cmb
etweent her adiator&
y
ourb ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXB
R1M
iniC
ore
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( M
AXB
R1M
iniC
ore)
Thisp
roductm eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anada
technicals pecifications.
Lep
resentp roduite
stc onformea uxs pecificationstechniquesa
pplicablesa
l'innovation,
Sciencee tD
eveloppemente conomiqueC anada.
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AX7
00
FederalCommunicationC
ommissionInterferenceStatement
RadiationExposureStatement
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCR Fr adiatione xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hise
quipments houldb einstalleda ndo
peratedw itha m
inimumd istanceo
f2
2
centimetersb
etweenther adiatora
ndy ourb ody.
ForM
AXH
D2IP67,M
AXH
D2M
ini,M
AXH
D2D
ome,M
AXH
D4IP67,M
AX
BR1E
NT,M
AXB
R1M
2M,S
peedFusionE
ngine
FederalC
ommunicationC
ommissionInterferenceS
tatement
IndustryC
anadaS tatement( MAXH
D2IP67,M
AXH
D2M
ini,M
AXH
D2D
ome,M
AXH
D4
IP67,M
AXB
R1E
NT,M AXB
R1M
2M,S
peedFusionE ngine)
Thisp
roductm
eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anadatechnical
specifications.
Lep
resentproduite
stc onformea
uxs pecificationstechniquesa
pplicablesd
'Innovation,S
ciencese
t
Developpemente conomiqueC anada.
BatteryC autionS
tatement ( MAXH
D2IP67,M
AXH
D1D
ome,M
AXH
D2D
ome,M
AXH
D4
IP67)
Risko
fe
xplosioniftheb
atteryisr eplacedb
ya
nincorrecttype.
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXHD2IP67 )
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXHD1Dome )
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with
CE radiation exposure limits
set
forth for
an
uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This
equipment should
be installed and
operated with
a minimum distance
of
20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
contacta ttps://www.peplink.com/
s:h
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXHD2Dome )
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with
CE radiation exposure limits
set
forth for
an
uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This
equipment should
be installed and
operated with
a minimum distance
of
20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
contacta ttps://www.peplink.com/
s:h
CES
tatementf orP
epwaveR
outers( M
AXB
R1E
SN)
2.4GHz( 2
412- 2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.78d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXH
D4
FederalC
ommunicationCommissionInterferenceStatement
Thise quipmenth asb eentesteda ndfoundtoc omplyw iththelimitsfora C
lassA d
igitald
evice,
pursuanttoP art1 5o
ftheF
CCR ules.T heselimitsa red esignedtop rovider easonablep rotection
againsth armfulinterferencew henthee quipmentiso peratedina c ommerciale nvironment.T his
equipmentg enerates,u ses,a
ndc anr adiater adiofrequencye nergy,a ndifitisn
otinstalleda ndu sedin
accordancew iththeinstructionm anual,itm ayc auseh armfulinterferencetor adioc ommunications.
Operationo fthise quipmentina r esidentiala
reaislikelytoc auseh armfulinterference,inw hichc ase
theu
serw
illb
er equiredtoc orrecttheinterferencea th
iso wne xpense.
RadiationExposureStatement
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCR
Fr adiatione
xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu ncontrollede
nvironment.
Thise
quipments houldb einstalleda
ndo peratedw itha
m
inimumd istanceo f4
0c entimetersb
etweenthe
radiatora
ndy ourb
ody.
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement(MAXH
D4)
Thisp
roductm
eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anadatechnical
specifications.
Lep
resentp
roduite
stc onformea
uxs pecificationstechniquesa
pplicablesd
'Innovation,S
ciencese
t
Developpemente conomiqueC anada.
Thisd
evicec ontainslicence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s)thatc omplyw
ithInnovation,S ciencea nd
EconomicD evelopmentC anada'slicence-exemptR
SS(s).O
perationiss ubjecttothefollowingtwo
conditions
(1)T
hisd
evicem
ayn
otc auseinterference.
(2)T
hisd evicem usta ccepta
nyinterference,includinginterferencethatm
ayc auseu
ndesiredo
pera-
tiono
fthed evice.
Lep
resenta ppareile
stc onformea
uxC NRd 'IndustrieC anadaa pplicablesa
uxa ppareilsr adioe
x-
emptsd elicence.L'exploitatione sta
utoriseea uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes
(1)l'appareiln
ed
oitp
asp
roduired
eb
rouillage,e
t
(2)l'utilisateurd el'appareild
oita
cceptertoutb
rouillager adioelectriques ubi,m
emes ileb
rouillagee
st
susceptibled 'en
(i)T
hed
eviceforo
perationintheb
and5
150-5250M Hziso
nlyforindooru
setor educethep
otentialfor
harmfulinterferencetoc o-channelm obiles atellites ystems;
(ii)F
ord
evicesw
ithd
etachablea ntenna(s),them aximuma ntennag ainp ermittedford evicesinthe
band5 725-5850M Hzs hallb
es uchthatthee
quipments tillc ompliesw iththee
.i.r.p.limitss pecifiedfor
point-to-pointa ndn on-point-to-pointo perationa sa
ppropriate;a nd
(i)L ed
ispositiffonctionnantd anslab
ande5 150-5250M Hze
str eserveu niquementp ouru neu
tilisation
al'interieura
find er eduirelesr isquesd eb
rouillagep
rejudiciablea uxs ystemesdes atellitesm
obiles
utilisantlesm emesc anaux;
(ii)L
eg
ainm aximald 'antennep ermisp ourlesd
ispositifsa veca
ntenne(s)a movible(s)u tilisantlab ande
5725-5850M Hzd oits ec onformera
lalimitationP .I.R.Es pecifieep ourl'exploitationp
ointa p
ointe
tn
on
pointa p
oint,s elonlec as.
Eno
utre,lesu
tilisateursdevraienta ussie trea
visesq uelesu tilisateursd er adarsd
eh
autep
uissance
sontd esignesu tilisateursp
rincipaux( c.-a-d.,q
u'ilso
ntlap
riorite)p ourlesb ande5 725-5850M Hze
t
quec esr adarsp ourraientc auserd
ub
rouillagee t/oud esd ommagesa uxd ispositifsL
AN-EL.
RadiationExposureStatement
Thisd
evicec ompliesw iththeISEDr adiatione
xposurelimits etforthfora
nu
ncontrollede
nvironment.
Thisd
evices houldb
einstalleda ndo
peratedw
ithm
inimumd istance4 0cmb etweenther adiator&
y our
body.
Cete
quipemente stc onformea
vecl'expositiona uxr adiationsISEDd efiniesp
ouru
ne
nvironnement
nonc ontrole.C ete quipementd oite
treinstallee
tu
tilisea
u
ned
istancem inimumd e4
0c me
ntrele
radiateure tv otrec orps.
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXHD4 )
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb
ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXHD4IP67 )
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with CE radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb
ody.
contacta s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(SpeedFusionEngine )
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
MC7455m
odule:
EC25-Em
odule:
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXT
ransit,M
AXT
ransitD
uo
FederalC
ommunicationC
ommissionInterferenceS
tatement
Thistransmitterm
ustn
otb
ec o-locatedo
ro
peratinginc onjunctionw
itha
nyo
thera
ntennao
r
transmitter.
Operationsinthe5
.15-5.25GHzb
anda
rer estrictedtoindooru
sageo
nly.
RadiationE
xposureS
tatement
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCR Fr adiatione xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hise
quipments houldb einstalleda ndo
peratedw itha m
inimumd istanceo
f2
4
centimetersb
etweenther adiatora
ndy ourb ody.
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( MAXT
ransit,M
AXT
ransitD
uo)
Thisp
roductm
eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anadatechnical
specifications.
Développementé
conomiqueC
anada.
Thisd
evicec ontainslicence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s)thatc omplyw
ithInnovation,S ciencea nd
EconomicD evelopmentC anada’slicence-exemptR
SS(s).O
perationiss ubjecttothefollowingtwo
conditions:
(1)T
hisd
evicem
ayn
otc auseinterference.
(2)T
hisd
evicem
usta
ccepta
nyinterference,includinginterferencethatm
ayc auseu
ndesiredo
pera-
tiono
fthed
evice.
Lep
resenta ppareile
stc onformea
uxC NRd 'IndustrieC anadaa pplicablesa
uxa ppareilsr adioe
x-
emptsd elicence.L
'exploitatione sta
utoriseea uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes:
(1)l’appareiln
ed
oitp
asp
roduired
eb
rouillage,e
t
(2)l’utilisateurd el’appareild
oita
cceptertoutb
rouillager adioelectriques ubi,m
emes ileb
rouillagee
st
susceptibled ’en
(i)T
hed
eviceforo
perationintheb
and5
150-5250M Hziso
nlyforindooru
setor educethep
otentialfor
harmfulinterferencetoc o-channelm obiles atellites ystems;
(ii)F
ord
evicesw
ithd
etachablea ntenna(s),them aximuma ntennag ainp ermittedford evicesinthe
band5 725-5850M Hzs hallb
es uchthatthee
quipments tillc ompliesw iththee
.i.r.p.limitss pecifiedfor
point-to-pointa ndn on-point-to-pointo perationa sa
ppropriate;a nd
(i)L ed
ispositiffonctionnantd anslab
ande5 150-5250M Hze
str eserveu niquementp ouru neu
tilisation
al'interieura
find er eduirelesr isquesd eb
rouillagep
rejudiciablea uxs ystemesd es atellitesm
obiles
utilisantlesm emesc anaux;
(ii)L
eg
ainm aximald 'antennep ermisp ourlesd
ispositifsa veca
ntenne(s)a movible(s)u tilisantlabande
5725-5850M Hzd oits ec onformera
lalimitationP .I.R.Es pecifieep ourl'exploitationp
ointa p
ointe
tn
on
pointa p
oint,s elonlec as.
Eno
utre,lesu
tilisateursd
evraienta ussie trea
visesq uelesu tilisateursd er adarsd
eh
autep
uissance
sontd esignesu tilisateursp
rincipaux( c.-a-d.,q
u'ilso
ntlap
riorite)pourlesb ande5 725-5850M Hze
t
quec esr adarsp ourraientc auserd
ub
rouillagee t/oud esd ommagesa uxd ispositifsL
AN-EL.
RadiationE
xposureS
tatement
Thisd
evicec ompliesw iththeISEDr adiatione
xposurelimits etforthfora
nu
ncontrollede
nvironment.
Thisd
evices houldb
einstalleda ndo
peratedw
ithm
inimumd istance3 0cmb etweenther adiator&
y our
body.
Cete
quipemente stc onformea
vecl'expositiona uxr adiationsISEDd efiniesp
ouru
ne
nvironnement
nonc ontrole.C ete quipementd oite
treinstallee
tu
tilisea
u
ned
istancem inimumd e3
0c me
ntrele
radiateure tv otrec orps.
BatteryC
autionS
tatement
Risko
fe
xplosionifthebatteryisr eplacedb
ya
nincorrecttype.
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXTransit/MAXTransitDuoForEM7565 )
2.4GHz( 2 412- 2
472M
Hz) : 1 8.68d
Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M Hz) : 1
8.19d Bm
WWAN: R efer3 GPPT S3
6.521- 1( U EP
owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with
CE radiation exposure limits
set
forth for
an
uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This
equipment should
be installed and
operated with
a minimum distance
of
20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXTransitForLM960A18 )
2.4GHz( 2 412- 2
472M
Hz) : 1 8.68d Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M Hz) : 1
8.19
d
Bm
WWAN: R efer3 GPPT S3
6.521- 1( U EP owerc
lass)
This equipment complies with
CE radiation exposure limits
set
forth for
an
uncontrolled envi-
ronment. This
equipment should
be installed and
operated with
a minimum distance
of
20cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXT
ransitM
ini
FederalCommunicationCommissionInterferenceStatement
Thise quipmenth asb eentesteda ndfoundtoc omplyw iththelimitsfora C
lassA d
igitald
evice,
pursuanttoP art1 5oftheF
CCR ules.T heselimitsa red esignedtop rovider easonablep rotection
againsth armfulinterferencew henthee quipmentiso peratedina c ommerciale nvironment.T his
equipmentg enerates,u ses,a
ndc anr adiater adiofrequencye nergy,a ndifitisn
otinstalleda ndu sedin
accordancew iththeinstructionm anual,itm ayc auseh armfulinterferencetor adioc ommunications.
Operationo fthise quipmentina r esidentiala
reaislikelytoc auseh armfulinterference,inw hichc ase
theu
serw
illb
er equiredtoc orrecttheinterferencea th
iso wne xpense.
RadiationExposureS
tatement
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCR Fr adiatione xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hise
quipments houldb einstalleda ndo
peratedw itha m
inimumd istanceo
f2
0
centimetersb
etweenther adiatora
ndy ourb ody.
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( MAXT
ransitM
ini)
Thisp
roductm
eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anadatechnical
specifications.
Cep
roduitr éponda
uxs pécificationstechniquesa
pplicablesà
l'innovation,S
ciencee
tD
éveloppement
économiqueC anada.
RadiationExposureStatement
Thisd
evicec ompliesw iththeISEDr adiatione
xposurelimits etforthfora
nu
ncontrollede
nvironment.
Thisd
evices houldb
einstalleda ndo
peratedw
ithm
inimumd istance2 0cmb etweenther adiator&
y our
body.
Ceté
quipemente stc onformea
vecl'expositiona uxr adiationsISEDd éfiniesp
ouru
ne
nvironnement
nonc ontrôlé.C eté quipementd oitê
treinstallée
tu
tiliséà
u
ned
istancem inimumd e2
0c me
ntrele
radiateure tv otrec orps.
Thisr adiotransmitterh asb
eena pprovedb yInnovation,S ciencea
ndE
conomicD evelopmentC anada
too peratew iththea ntennatypeslistedb elow,w iththem
aximump ermissibleg ainindicated.A
ntenna
typesn otincludedinthislistthath avea g aing reaterthanthem
aximumg ainindicatedfora nytype
listeda res trictlyp rohibitedforu
sew iththisd evice.
C
EStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXTransitMini )
2.4GHz( 2
412- 2
472M
Hz) : 1
9.78d
Bm
WWAN: R efer3 GPPT S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC ommission( FCC)C omplianceN otice:
ForM
AXB R1P
RO,M
AXB R2P
RO,U BRL TE
FederalCommunicationC
ommissionInterferenceStatement
RadiationExposureStatement
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCR Fr adiatione xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hise
quipments houldb einstalleda ndo
peratedw itha m
inimumd istanceo
f2
3
centimetersb
etweenther adiatora
ndy ourb ody.
IndustryC
anadaS
tatement( MAXB
R1P
RO,M
AXB
R2P
RO,U
BRL
TE)
Thisp
roductm
eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anadatechnical
specifications.
Lep
résentp
roduite
stc onformea
uxs pécificationstechniquesa
pplicablesd
'Innovation,S
ciencese
t
Développementé conomiqueC anada.
Thisd
evicec ontainslicence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s)thatc omplyw
ithInnovation,S ciencea nd
EconomicD evelopmentC anada’slicence-exemptR
SS(s).O
perationiss ubjecttothefollowingtwo
conditions:
(1)T
hisd
evicem
ayn
otc auseinterference.
(2)T
hisd evicem usta ccepta
nyinterference,includinginterferencethatm
ayc auseu
ndesiredo
pera-
tiono
fthed evice.
Lep
resenta ppareile
stc onformea
uxC NRd 'IndustrieC anadaapplicablesa uxa ppareilsr adioe
x-
emptsd elicence.L
'exploitatione sta
utoriseea uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes:
(1)l’appareiln
ed
oitp
asp
roduired
eb
rouillage,e
t
(2)l’utilisateurd el’appareild
oita
cceptertoutb
rouillager adioelectriques ubi,m
emes ileb
rouillagee
st
susceptibled ’en
WIFIA
ntennatype:R eplacementA ntenna
WIFIA
ntennag ain:2
.4GHzI2 .44d
Bi,5
GHzI4
.73d
Bi
LTEA
ntennatype:R eplacementA ntenna( 04-410055-00)
LTEA
ntennag ain:4
d
Bi
LTEA
ntennatype:R eplacementA ntenna( 04-410093-01)
LTEA
ntennag ain:4
.38d Bi
(i)T
hed
eviceforo
perationintheb
and5
150–5250M Hziso
nlyforindooru
setor educethep
otentfor
harmfulinterferencetoc o-channelm obiles atellites ystems;
(ii)F
ord evicesw
ithd
etachablea ntenna(s),them aximuma ntennag ainp ermittedford evicesinthe
band5 725-5850M Hzs hallb es uchthatthee quipments tillc ompliesw iththee .i.r.p.limitsa s
appropriate;( detachablea ntennao nly);a
nd
Theh igh-powerr adarsa rea llocateda sp rimaryu sers( i.e.p
riorityu
sers)o ftheb and5 725-5850M Hz
andthattheser adarsc ouldc auseinterferencea nd/ord amagetoL E-LANd evices.
(iii)w
herea
pplicable,a
ntennatype(s),a ntennam odels(s),a
ndw orst-casetilta ngle(s)n
ecessaryto
remainc ompliantw iththee
.i.r.p.e
levationm askr equirements etforthins ection6
.2.2.3s hallb
ec learly
indicated.
(i)L
edispositiffonctionnantd anslab
ande5 150-5250M Hze
str eserveu niquementp ouru tilisationa
l'interieura find
er eduirelesr isquesd
eb
rouillagep
rejudiciablea uxs ystemesd es atellitesm obiles
utilisantlesm emesc anaux;
(ii)L
eg
ainm aximald ’antennep ermisp ourlesd
ispositifsa veca
ntenne(s)a movible(s)u tilisantlab ande
5725-5850M Hzd oitsec onformerà lalimitationP .I.R.Es pécifiéep ourl’exploitationp
ointà p
ointe
tn
on
pointà p
oint,s elonlec as.( antenned étachableu niquement)
Eno
utre,lesu
tilisateursd
evraienta ussie trea
visesq uelesu tilisateursd er adarsd
eh
autep
uissance
sontd esignesu tilisateursp
rincipaux( c.-a-d.,q
u'ilso
ntlap
riorite)p ourlesb ande5 725-5850M Hze
t
quec esr adarsp ourraientc auserd
ub
rouillagee t/oud esd ommagesa uxd ispositifsL
AN-EL.
(iii)E
no utre,lesu
tilisateursd evraienta
ussie
trea
visesq
uelesu tilisateursd er adarsd eh
aute
puissances ontd esignesu tilisateursp
rincipaux( c.-a-d.,q
u'ilso
ntlap
riorite)p
ourlesb
ande5 725-5850
MHze t
RadiationE
xposureS
tatement
Thisd
evicec ompliesw iththeISEDr adiatione
xposurelimits etforthfora
nu
ncontrollede
nvironment.
Thisd
evices houldb
einstalleda ndo
peratedw
ithm
inimumd istance2 3c mb
etweenther adiator&
y our
body.
Cete
quipemente stc onformea
vecl'expositiona uxr adiationsISEDd efiniesp
ouru
ne
nvironnement
nonc ontrole.C ete quipementd oite
treinstallee
tu
tilisea
u
ned
istancem inimumd e2
3c me
ntrele
radiateure tv otrec orps.
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXBR1PRO/MAXBR2PRO/UBRLTE)
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
FCCR equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC ommission( FCC)C omplianceN otice:
ForM
AXB R1IP55,M
AXB
R2IP55
FederalCommunicationCommissionInterferenceStatement
RadiationExposureStatement
Thise
quipmentc ompliesw ithF
CCR Fr adiatione xposurelimitss etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hise
quipments houldb einstalleda ndo
peratedw itha m
inimumd istanceo
f2
0
centimetersb
etweenther adiatora
ndy ourb ody.
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXBR1IP55 )
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
CEStatementforPepwaveRouters(MAXBR2IP55 )
2.4GHz( 2
412- 2
472M
Hz) : 1
8.99d
Bm
5GHz( 5
150- 5
250M
Hz) : 2
2.95d
Bm
5GHz( 5
725- 5
850M
Hz) : 1
2.80d
Bm
WWAN: R
efer3
GPPT
S3
6.521- 1( U
EP
owerc
lass)
contacta
s:h
ttps://www.peplink.com/
USBW
ANM
odemP
ortS
pecification
MAXS
eries
MAXH
D2/ MAXB R1
MAXH D4/M
AX
MAXH
D2 MAXH
D2/
MAX7
00 MAXH D2
ENT HD4M
ediaF ast/
Mini HD4M
BX
MediaF
ast MAXB
R1NT MediaFast2 00
OutputR
ating 5VD
C,2
A 5VD
C,2
A 5VD
C,2
A 5VD
C,0
.5A 5VD
C,2
A 5VD
C,2
A
FCCR
equirementsf orO
perationint heU
nitedS
tates
FederalC
ommunicationsC
ommission( FCC)C
omplianceN
otice:
ForM
AXT
ransitP
roE
/M
AXT
ransitL
TEA
FCC1
5.21:
Anyc hangeso rm
odificationsn ote
xpresslya
pprovedb ythep
artyr esponsibleforc ompliance
couldv oidy oura
uthoritytoo
peratethee
quipment.
FCC1
5.105
Thise quipmenth asb eentesteda ndfoundtoc omplyw iththelimitsfora C
lassA d
igital
device,p ursuanttop art1
5o
ftheF CCR ules.T heselimitsa red esignedtop rovider easonable
protectiona gainsth armfulinterferencew henthee quipmentiso peratedina c ommercial
environment.T hise quipmentg enerates,u ses,a ndc anr adiater adiofrequencye nergya nd,if
notinstalleda ndu sedina ccordancew iththeinstructionm anual,itm ayc auseh armful
interferencetor adioc ommunications.O perationo fthise quipmentina r esidentiala reais
likelytoc auseh armfulinterference,inw hichc asetheu serw illb
er equiredtoc orrectthe
interferencea th
iso wne xpense.
RFexposurewarning
Thise quipmentm ustb einstalleda ndo
peratedina ccordancew ithp
rovidedinstructionsa nd
thea
ntenna(s)u sedforthistransmitterm ustb einstalledtop
rovidea s eparationd istanceo fa
t
least2 0c mfroma llp
ersonsa ndm
ustn otb ec o-locatedo ro
peratinginc onjunctionw itha
ny
othera ntennao rtransmitter.E nd-usersa ndinstallersm ustb ep
rovidedw itha
ntenna
installationinstructionsa ndtransmittero peratingc onditionsfors atisfyingR Fe xposure
compliance.
ICESS
tatement
Thisp
roductm eetsthea
pplicableInnovation,S
ciencea
ndE
conomicD
evelopmentC
anada
technicals pecifications.
Lep
résentp
roduite
stc onformea uxs pécificationstechniquesa
pplicablesd
'Innovation,
Sciencese tD
éveloppementé conomiqueC anada.
Thisd evicec ontainslicence-exempttransmitter(s)/receiver(s)thatc omplyw
ithInnovation,
Sciencea ndE
conomicD evelopmentC anada’slicence-exemptR SS(s).O
perationiss ubject
tothefollowingtwoc onditions:
1.T
hisd
evicem
ayn
otc auseinterference.
2.T
hisd
evicem usta
ccepta nyinterference,includinginterferencethatm
ayc auseu
ndesired
operationo fthed
evice.
Lep
resenta
ppareile
stc onformea
uxC
NRd
'IndustrieC
anadaa
pplicablesa
uxa
ppareilsr adio
exemptsd elicence.
L'exploitatione
sta
utoriseea
uxd
euxc onditionss uivantes:
1.l’appareiln
ed
oitp
asp
roduired
eb
rouillage,e
t
2.l’utilisateurd el’appareild
oita
cceptertoutb
rouillager adioelectriques ubi,m
emes ile
brouillagee sts usceptibled ’en
RFexposurewarning
Thisd
evicec ompliesw iththeISEDr adiatione xposurelimits etforthfora
nu
ncontrolled
environment.T hisd
evices houldb einstalleda
ndo peratedw ithm inimumd istance2 0cm
betweenther adiator& y ourb ody.T
histransmitterm ustn
otb
ec o-locatedo ro
peratingin
conjunctionw itha
nyo
thera ntennao rtransmitter.
Ceté
quipemente stc onformea vecl'expositiona uxr adiationsISEDd éfiniesp ouru n
environnementn onc ontrôlé.C eté
quipementd oitê treinstallée
tu
tiliséà u
ned istance
minimumd e2
0c me ntreler adiateure tv otrec orps.C eté metteurn ed oitp asê
tre
colocaliséeso uo pérante nc onjonctiona vecu nea utrea ntenneo utransmetteur.
Thisr adiotransmitterIC:2 0682-P1835h asb
eena pprovedb yInnovation,S ciencea nd
EconomicD evelopmentC anadatoo peratew iththea ntennatypeslistedb elow,w
iththe
maximump ermissibleg ainindicated.A ntennatypesn otincludedinthislistthath
avea g
ain
greaterthanthem aximumg ainindicatedfora nytypelisteda res trictlyp
rohibitedforu
sew ith
thisd
evice.
Ceté metteurr adioIC:2 0682-P1835a é
téa
pprouvép arInnovation,S ciencese t
Développementé conomiqueC anadad oitfonctionnera veclestypesd 'antennesé numérés
ci-dessous,a vecleg ainm aximala dmissibleindiqué.L estypesd 'antennen oninclusd
ans
cettelisteq
uio
ntu
ng ains upérieura ug ainm aximumindiquép ourtouttyper épertoriés ont
strictementinterditsp ouru neu tilisationa vecc eta
ppareil.